Atex-D Eu

Expertise – Passion – Automation
ATEX Compliant Products

SMC - provide products
compliant to ATEX Directive
Outline of ATEX directive New elements at a glance

Previous legislation covered the most obvious sources of ignition
Since 1st July 2003, equipment used in generated by electrical devices.
potentially explosive atmospheres The ATEX directive and the corresponding harmonized standards
have extended the applicability of legislation to non-electrical
within the EU is required to comply with products as well.
the ATEX directive.
Pneumatic equipment used in potentially explosive atmospheres
must, therefore, be assessed in line with the new directive.
ATEX,New Approach directives and
CE marking
Directive 2014/34/EU, known as ATEX directive, is one of the
directives based on the New Approach towards technical
harmonization and standardization.
The New Approach is a new regulatory technique and strategy laid
down by the European Council Resolution of 1985, in order to allow
free movement of goods within the EU market and to prevent barriers
to trade.
Products in compliance with all provisions of applicable directives
(such as Directive 2014/34/EU for ATEX) must bear the CE marking.
This is an indication that the products comply with the requirements
of applicable directives and have been subjected to the conformity
assessment procedure provided for in these directives.
ATEX definitions
Potentially explosive atmospheres are atmospheres likely to become
explosive due to local and operational conditions.
The ATEX Directive regards "explosive atmospheres" as a mixture
with air, under atmospheric conditions, of flammable substances in
the form of gases, vapours, mists or dusts in which, after ignition has
occurred, combustion spreads to the entire unburned mixture.
(Quotation from Directive 2014/34/EU Article 1(4))
Certified equipment is designed to prevent the generation of ignition
sources such as: Electric sparks, arcs and flashes, electrostatic
discharges, electromagnetic waves, ionizing radiation, hot surfaces,
flames and hot gases, mechanically generated sparks, optical
radiation, chemical flame initiation, compression.
Zone Classification
Potentially explosive environments are classified by the Safety and
Protection of Workers Directive 1999/92/EC.
These are:
• 0, 1, 2 for gas explosive atmospheres
• 20, 21, 22 for dust explosive atmospheres
Zone 2 Zone 1
Category 3 Category 2
The ATEX directive defines categories of equipment and
Zone 0 protective systems, which can be used in the corresponding zones
Category 1 as per the following table.
Zone Equipment Presence of the explosive
Gas Dust category atmosphere
Continuously or for long periods
0 20 1 >1000 hours/year
Occasionally
1 21 2 10~1000 hours/year
Rarely or for short periods
2 22 3 <10 hours/year
Features-1
INDEX
<Note for ordering ATEX compliant products>
Some items may not be compliant with the ATEX Directive. For details, refer to How to Order.
For Self Declaration of Conformity, refer to our sales representative.
List of ATEX compliant products

Category
Page no.
Pneumatic 1 2 3
5 Port Solenoid Valve: 52-SY5000/7000/9000 앬 1
Solenoid Valve
5 Port Solenoid Valve: 50-VFE3000/5000-X60 앬 21
3 Port Solenoid Valve: 50-VPE500/700-X60 앬 29
5 Port Solenoid Valve: 56-VQC1000/2000/4000 앬 34
Serial Transmission System Fieldbus System for outputs: 56-EX260 앬 49

Fieldbus System: 56-EX600 앬 50
Air Cylinder Air Cylinder: 55-C76 앬 54
ISO Cylinder: 55-C85 앬 58
ISO Cylinder: 55-C95 (Bore sizes: 160, 200, 250) 앬 61
ISO Cylinder: 55-CP96 앬 71
ISO Cylinder: 55-JCM 앬 82
Air Cylinder: 55-CG1 앬 83
Stainless steal Cylinder: 55-CG5-S 앬 86
Air Cylinder: 55-CS1 앬 87
Compact Cylinder: 55-CQ2 앬 91
Dual Rod Cylinder: 55-CXS 앬 96
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder/Basic Type: 55-MY1B (-Z) 앬 99
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder/Slide Bearing Guide Type: 55-MY1M 앬 100
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder/Linear Guide Type: 55-MY1H (-Z) 앬 101
Auto Switch Solid State Switch 앬 102

Reed Switch 앬 102
Rotary Actuator Rotary Actuator: 55-CRB1 앬 120

Rotary Actuator: 56-CRB1 앬 120
Rotary Actuator: 55-CRB2-Z 앬 122
Rotary Actuator: 56-CRB2-Z 앬 122
Rotary Actuator/Free Mount Type: 55-CRBU2-Z 앬 124
Rotary Actuator/Free Mount Type: 56-CRBU2-Z 앬 124
Compact Rotary Actuator: 55-CRQ2 앬 126
Compact Rotary Actuator: 56-CRQ2 앬 127
Booster Regulator Booster Regulator: 56-VBA 앬 128
Pressure Switch 2-Colour Display Digital Pressure Switch: 56-ISE70/75 (H) 앬 130
Pressure Switch, Reed Switch Type: 56-IS10 앬 132
2 Port Valve for Fluid Control Steam Valve: 56-VND 앬 137
Process Valve Valve for Water and Chemical Base Fluids (2/3 port air operated valve): VCC 앬 138
Air Operated Chemical Valve/Threaded Type: 55-LVA 앬 142
Process Pumps/Automatically Operated Type (Internal switching type)
- Air Operated Type (External Switching Type): 55-PA3000/5000 앬 149
- Air Operated Type (External Switching Type): 56-PA3000/5000 앬 150
Instrumentation Equipment Pneumatic-Pneumatic Positioner: 55-IP5000/5100 앬 151

Pneumatic-Pneumatic Positioner: 56-IP5000/5100 앬 151
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner: IP6000/6100-X14 앬 153
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner: IP8000-X14/IP8100-X14 앬 157
Smart Positioner: 52-IP8001/52-IP8101 앬 161
Cylinder Positioner: 56-IP200 앬 165
Features-2
ATEX label example and explanation
SMC CORPORATION
4-14-1 Soto-Kanda "Do not disconnect when energized"
Chiyoda-ku
Tokyo 101-0021, Japan
II 3 G / D
Group II
Ex nA IIC T6 Gc X Category 1 2 3
VQCxxx ATEX Atmosphere* G D G D G D
HO compliance *G=Gas D=Dust
Tamb= -10 °C to +50 °C
IP65
T 80 °C
Standards Standards
Part-number for for
Category Electrical Non-electrical
Year
product product
Operating temperature
IP (only for Dust) General requirements all EN 60079-0 EN 80079-36
T temperature(only for Dust)
Dust protection all EN 60079-0 EN 80079-36
Types of Protection
Constructional safety "c" 2 EN 80079-37
Max. Surface Types of Protection "n" 3 EN 60079-15
temperature
T1 450 °C Increased Safety "e" 2 EN 60079-7
Encapsulation "m" 2 EN 60079-18
T2 300 °C
Flameproof Enclosure "d" 2 EN 60079-1
T3 200 °C Oil lmmersion "o" 2 EN 60079-6 EN 13463-3
T4 135 °C Pressurized "p" 2 EN 60079-2 EN 13463-7
T5 100 °C Powder Filling "q" 2 EN 60079-5
T6 85 °C Intrinsically Safety "ia" 1 EN 60079-11
Intrinsically Safety "ib" 2 EN 60079-11
X = means that special conditions for use are in the

installation manual e.g. protect products against impact
Features-3
ATEX Compliant
5 Port Solenoid Valve
Series 52-SY
II 2G Ex ia IIC T4...T5 Gb Ta−10 °C to 50 °C
0344
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 Gb Ta−10 °C to 45 °C
How to Order
52 - SY 5 1 2 0 L 3 01 F
Bracket
ATEX – No bracket
category 2 F1 With foot bracket ∗
F2 With side bracket ∗∗
Series ∗Foot bracket only available for 2
5 52-SY5000 position single solenoid valve
7 52-SY7000 52-SY5000 and 52-SY7000.
9 52-SY9000 ∗∗Side bracket only for 52-SY5000
and 52-SY7000
∗∗∗No bracket for only body ported
Type of actuation type's 52-SY9000.
1 2-position single
2 2-position double Thread style
3 3-position closed centre – Rc
4 3-position exhaust centre F G
5 3-position pressure centre N NPT
T NPTF
Piping style
2 Body ported type Type of actuation
4 Base mounted type
Sign Port size Compatible series
01 1/8
Pilot C4 Ø 4 One-touch fitting
– Internal pilot C6 Ø 6 One-touch fitting
R External pilot* C8 Ø 8 One-touch fitting 52-SY5000
*Only the base mounted type. N3 Ø 5/32" One-touch fitting
N7 Ø 1/4" One-touch fitting
Barrier N9 Ø 5/16" One-touch fitting
– Without barrier 02 1/4
A Z728.H C8 Ø 8 One-touch fitting
B MTL728P+ C10 Ø 10 One-touch fitting 52-SY7000
F KFD0-SD2-Ex1.1065 N9 Ø 5/16" One-touch fitting
Note) One barrier per solenoid supplied. N11 Ø 3/8" One-touch fitting
Additionally, when the barrier is selected, 02 1/4
the barriers equivalent to the number of 03 3/8
solenoids are included with the product. C8 Ø 8 One-touch fitting
C10 Ø 10 One-touch fitting 52-SY9000
C12 Ø 12 One-touch fitting
Electrical entry N9 Ø 5/16" One-touch fitting
L Plug connector type N11 Ø 3/8" One-touch fitting
LL Plug connector with cover type Port size (Base mounted type)
TT Terminal type
Sign Port size Compatible series
- No sub-plate
Lead wire length 02 1/4 52-SY5000
02 1/4
3 300 mm 52-SY7000
03 3/8
6 600 mm
03 3/8
10 1000 mm 52-SY9000
04 1/2
15 1500 mm
20 2000 mm
30 3000 mm
100 10000 mm (semi-standard) Manual override
L type has 300 mm and 600 mm only. – Non locking push style
D Push-turn locking slotted style
E Push-turn locking lever style
1
Series 52-SY
Specifications Safety Instructions
Series 52-SY5000 52-SY7000 52-SY9000 1) This product is not suitable for Zone 0. The suitable zones are Zones 1 and 2.
2) SMC-TAS and TAU Series, antistatic tubing, is available if required.
Ambient and fluid Temperature class T6 –10 to 45 °C (No freezing)
3) The solenoid valve has polarity (+ -). Confirm the correct polarity by referring to the
temperature Temperature class T4, T5 –10 to 50 °C (No freezing) colour of the lead wires. If the polarity is reversed, the barrier maybe damaged.
Coil temperature rise 40 °C or less (at rated) 4) Confirm that the solenoid input voltage at the lead wires is DC 10.8 V (min).
5) The product must be connected to a certified barrier or certified intrinsically safe circuit
Barrier input voltage (non hazardous area) 24 V DC (System rated voltage) at 1.1 W with the follow maximum Values:
Solenoid valve input voltage (hazardous area) 12 V DC at 0.52 W Ui= 28V
li= 225mA (resistively limited)
Intrinsically safe ia
Pi= 1W
Gas group IIC Ci= 0 nF
Li= 0 mH
L type Plug connector IP30 (LL type : IP40)
Electrical entry Note) The valve is not connected to barrier when supplied.
T type terminal box IP65
Note 1) Impact resistance: No malfunction resulted from the impact test using a drop impact tester.
The test were performed one time each in the axial and right angle directions of the main valve
Response time
and armature, in both energized and de-energized states (Valve in the initial stage). Response time (ms) (0.5 MPa)
Vibration resistance: No malfunction occurred in a one-sweep test between 8.3 and 2000Hz. The Configuration
test was performed for both energized and de-energized states in the axial and right angle 52-SY5000 52-SY7000 52-SY9000
directions of the main valve and armature (valve in the initial stage). 2-position single 26 or less 38 or less 50 or less
2-position double 22 or less 30 or less 50 or less
3-position 38 or less 56 or less 70 or less
Note 1) According to dynamic performance test JIS B8375-1981.
Note 2) Response time when barriers were combined with a valve.
Standard SY manifolds Types 20, 41, 42 are used for 52-SY valves System A: Valve + Z728.H
B: Valve + MTL728P+
F: Valve + KFD0-SD2-Ex1.1065
Manifold specifications for 20 type Manifold specifications for 20 type
Model SS5Y5-20 SS5Y7-20 Port size Flow characteristics

Applicable valve 52-SY5*20 52-SY7*20 Model 1 > 4/2 (P>A/B) 4/2 > 5/3 (A/B > EA/EB)
1,5,3 4,2 Note 2) Note 2)
Manifold style Single base/ B mounting (P,EA,EB) (A,B) c[dm3/(s.bar)] b Cv Q [l/min (ANR)] c[dm3/(s.bar)] b Cv Q [l/min (ANR)]
1 (SUP)/ 3/5 (EXH) Common SUP/ Common EXH SS5Y5-20 1/4 C8 1.9 0.28 0.48 477 2.2 0.20 0.53 527
Valve stations 2 to 20 (1) SS5Y7-20 1/4 C10 3.6 0.31 0.93 921 3.6 0.27 0.88 898
4/2 (A/B) Location Valve Note 1) Values for 5 stations manifold with a 2 position single type valve.
Note 2) These valves have been calculated according to ISO 6358 and indicate the flow rate
Port size 1,3,5 (P,EA,EB) Port 1/4 under standard conditions with an inlet pressure of 0.6 MPa (relative pressure) and a
1/8 1/4
pressure drop of 0.1 MPa.
C4 (One-touch fittings for Ø 4 mm) C8 (One-touch fittings for Ø 8 mm)
4,2 (A,B) Port C6 (One-touch fittings for Ø 6 mm) C10 (One-touch fittings for Ø 10 mm)
C8 (One-touch fittings for Ø 8 mm)
Manifold base weight W (g) n: Station W=36n+64 W=43n+64
Note 1) For more than 10 stations (more than 5 stations in case of SS5Y7), supply pressure to P port on
both sides and exhaust from EA/EB port on both side.
Note 2) 52-SY9*20 valve are not available with manifold as standard.
Manifold specifications for 41 and 42 type Manifold specifications for 41 and 42 type
Model SS5Y5-41 SS5Y5-42 SS5Y7-42 Port size Flow characteristics

Applicable valve 52-SY5*40 52-SY7*40 Model 1,5,3 4,2 1 > 4/2 (P>A/B) 4/2 > 5/3 (A/B > EA/EB)
Note 2) Note 2)
Manifold style Single base/ B mounting (P,EA,EB) (A,B) c[dm3/(s.bar)] b Cv Q [l/min (ANR)] c[dm3/(s.bar)] b Cv Q [l/min (ANR)]
1 (SUP)/ 3/5 (EXH) Common SUP/ Common EXH SS5Y5-41 1/4 C8 1.8 0.23 0.44 439 1.9 0.16 0.45 445
Valve stations 2 to 20 (1) SS5Y5-42 1/4 C8 1.9 0.20 0.46 455 1.9 0.12 0.43 436
4/2 (A/B) Location Base SS5Y7-42 1/4 C10 3.0 0.25 0.75 740 3.0 0.12 0.66 688
Porting spec. Direction Side Note 1) Values for 5 stations manifold with a 2 position single type valve.
1/4 Note 2) These valves have been calculated according to ISO 6358 and indicate the flow rate under
Port size 1,3,5 (P,EA,EB) Port 1/4
standard conditions with an inlet pressure of 0.6 MPa (relative pressure) and a pressure drop
1/8 1/4 1/4 of 0.1 MPa.
4,2 (A,B) Port C6 (One-touch fittings for Ø 6 mm) C6 (One-touch fittings for Ø 6 mm) C10 (One-touch fittings
C8 (One-touch fittings for Ø 8 mm) C8 (One-touch fittings for Ø 8 mm) for Ø 10 mm)
Manifold base weight W (g) n: Station W=61n+101 W=79n+127 W=100n+151
Note 1) For more than 10 stations (more than 5 stations in case of SS5Y7), supply pressure to P port on
both sides and exhaust from EA/EB port on both side.
Note 2) 52-SY9*40 valve are not available with manifold as standard. Please contact SMC if you require it:
Note 3) 52-SY series are not available with resin type manifold (23 type, 20P type and 45 type).
2
5 Port Solenoid Valve Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Body ported type
Dimensions/Series 52-SY5000
2-position single
Plug connector type (L) In case with foot bracket
52-SY5120-L-01(-F2) 52-SY5120-L-01-F1
3-1/8" 32.3
0.8
{1(P),5(EA),3(EB) Ports}
1.6
15
(20)
EA P EB
2-Ø 2.2
(Positioning for 27.2
manifold gasket)
(45)
2-Ø 3.2 (37)
(Mounting holes)
(For E type)
111.8
0.3mm2
44
(40.2)
(36.7)
40
32.5
20.5
Ø 1.55
14.7
(1.2) (32.3)
(11.7) L 109.1
1.2
(Lead wire length) 65
11.6
Insulation
Black(-) 32.5 10.5
B
A 47
Insulation
Manual override 2-Ø 3.2 38 4.5
Red(+) 16.2 (Mounting holes for manifold)
36 2-1/8"
22.6 21 {4(A),2(B) Port}
16.6
22
29
16.7
14.7 2-Ø 3.2

(Mounting holes)
40
2-M3 Threads depth 3.5

(For bracket mounting)
Plug connector with cover type (LL)

52-SY5120-LL-01(-F2)
Insulation: red(+)
Insulation: black(-)
Ø 4.1
0.3 mm2
14.7
L 104
(Lead wire length)
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY5120-TT-01(-F2)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
Ø 5.9
12
0.75 mm 2
L 120.8
(Lead wire length)
Max.10
3
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Body ported type
3-1/8" (76.8)
2-position double {1(P),5(EA),3(EB) Ports}
0.8
Plug connector type (L)
1.6
(20)
52-SY5220-L-01(-F2)
15
EA P EB
2-Ø 2.2 27.2

(Positioning for manifold gasket)
(45)
2-Ø 3.2
37
(Mounting holes)
(For E type)
0.3 mm 2
(36.7)
40
44
32.5
(40.2)
20.5
14.7
Ø 1.55
(1.2)
L 153.6
(Lead wire length) 65.4 (11.7)
11.6
Insulation
Black(-) B
Insulation A
Red(+) Manual override 2-Ø 3.2
16.2 (Mounting holes for manifold)
36 2-1/8"
22.6 {4(A),2(B) Port}
16.7
2-M3 Threads depth 3.5


52-SY5220-LL-01(-F2)
L 143.4
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
Insulation :Black(-)
Ø 4.1
14.7
0.3 mm2
(71.7)
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY5220-TT-01(-F2)
Max.10
L 177
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking

No.1(+), No.2(-)
Ø 5.9
12
0.75 mm2
(88.5)
4
Dimensions
Body ported type 3-1/8"
{1(P),5(EA),3(EB) Ports}
Dimensions/Series 52-SY5000 89.4
3-position closed centre
0.8
1.6
-exhaust centre-
(20)
15
pressure centre EA P EB
Plug connector type (L) 2-Ø 2.2 27.2
3 (Positioning for
(45)
52-SY5420-L-01(-F2) manifold gasket)
(37) 2-Ø 3.2
5 (Mounting holes)
0.3 mm 2
(For E type)
(36.7)
44
40
32.5
(40.2)
20.5
14.7
Ø 1.55
L 166.2 (1.2)
(Lead wire length) (89.4)
32.7 45.3
11.6
Insulation
Black(-)
B
A
Insulation
Red(+) 2-Ø 3.2
16.2
Manual override (Mounting holes for manifold)
36
2-1/8"
22.6 {4(A),2(B) Port}
16.7
2-M3 threads depth 3.5


3
52-SY5420-LL-01(-F2)
5
L 156
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
Insulation: Black(-)
Ø 4.1
14.7
0.3 mm 2
84.3
Terminal type (TT)

3
52-SY5420-TT-01(-F2)
5 Max.10
L 189.6
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
Ø 5.9
12
0.75 mm 2
101.1
5
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Body ported type
Dimensions/Series 52-SY7000 In case with foot bracket
2-position single 52-SY7120-L-02-(F1)
52-SY7120-L-02(-F2)
1/4"
{1(P) Port} 39.4
0.9
2-1/8"
2
{5(EA),3(EB) Ports}
(23.9)
18
EA P EB
2-Ø 2.2 36
(14) (Positioning for manifold gasket) (66)
1.2 (52)
2-Ø 4.2
(Mounting holes)
125
(49.5)
(For E type)
0.3mm 2
(42.5)
44
40
40
24.5
14.7
1.2
(39.4)
L 123.3 39.5 13
(Lead wire length) 79.2
Insulation Manual override 57

Black(-) B 46 5.5
13.6
A
Insulation
2-Ø 4.2
Red(+)
20 (Mounting holes for manifold)
19.8
28
38
42 2-1/4"
{4(A),2(B) Port}
2-M4 threads depth 6.5 20 29.4
14.7
7
40

52-SY7120-LL-02(-F2)
Insulation: Red(+)
Ø4.1
14.7
0.3 mm 2
L 118.2
(Lead wire length)
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY7120-TT-02(-F2)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
Ø5.9
0.75 mm 2
12
L 135
(Lead wire length)
Max.10
6
Dimensions
Body ported type
1/4"
Dimensions/Series 52-SY7000 {1(P) Port}
(83.9)
2-1/8"
2-position double
0.9
{5(EA),3(EB) Ports}
18
52-SY7220-L-02(-F2) EA P EB
(23.9)
36
2-Ø 2.2
(Positioning for manifold gasket) (66)
(52)
2-Ø 4.2
(Mounting holes)
(For E type)
0.3 mm 2
(42.5)
44
(49.5)
40
40
24.5
14.7
Ø1.55
(1.2) L 167.8
(Lead wire length)
(14) 79.6
Insulation
Black(-) B
13.6
Insulation A
Manual override 2-Ø 4.2
Red(+) 20 (Mounting holes for manifold)
2-1/4"
42
{4(A),2(B) Port}
20 2-M4 threads depth 6.5
7

52-SY7220-LL-02(-F2)
L 157.6
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
Ø 4.1
14.7
0.3 mm 2
(78.8)
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY7220-TT-02(-F2)
Max.10
L 191.2
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking

No.1(+), No.2(-)
Ø 5.9
0.75 mm 2
12
(95.6)
7
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Body ported type
Dimensions/Series 52-SY7000 1/4"
{1(P) Port}
3-position closed centre/ 96.9
exhaust centre/ 2-1/8"
0.9
{5(EA),3(EB) Ports}
pressure centre
2
18
EA P EB
3
52-SY7420-L-02(-F2)
(23.9)
36
5 2-Ø 2.2
(Positioning for (66)
manifold gasket) (52)
2-Ø 4.2
(Mounting holes)
(For E type)
0.3 mm 2
(42.5)
44
(49.5)
40
40
24.5
14.7
Ø 1.55
L 180.8 (1.2)
(Lead wire length) (14)
39.8 52.8
Insulation
Black(-) B
Insulation A 13.6
Manual override 2-Ø 4.2
Red(+) 20 (Mounting holes for manifold)
2-1/4"
42
{4(A),2(B) Port}
20 2-M4 Threads depth 6.5
7

3
52-SY7420-LL-02(-F2)
5 L
(Lead wire length)
170.6
Insulation: Red(+)
Ø 4.1
14.7
0.3 mm 2
91.8
Terminal type (TT)

3
52-SY7420-TT-02(-F2)
5 Max.10
L 204.2
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking

No.1(+), No.2(-)
Ø 5.9
0.75 mm 2
12
108.6
8
Dimensions
Body ported type
2-position single
3-1/4"
Plug connector type (L) {1(P),3(EB),5(EA) Ports}
56.3
0.5
52-SY9120-L-03 02

23
5EA 1P 3EB
0.5
49.8
0.3 mm2
(For E type)
51.5
46
42
36.6
16.7
Ø 1.55
10
2-Ø 4.4
24.9 43.85 (12)
(Mounting holes)
L 153.4
(Lead wire length)
109.3
6.5 56.3
Insulation
Black(-)
4A 2B
18.4
Insulation Manual override
Red(+) 33.6
3-Ø 3.2
64.2 (Mounting holes of manifold)
2-1/4",3/8"
{4(A),2(B) Port}

52-SY9120-LL-0302

Insulation: Red(+)
Ø 4.1
16.7
0.3 mm2
L 148.3
(Lead wire length)
Terminal (TT)
02
52-SY9120-TT-03
Lead wire marking

No.1(+), No.2(-)
14
0.75 mm 2
L 165.1
(Lead wire length)
Max.10
9
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Body ported type
2-position double
97.1
Plug connector type (L) 3-1/4"
{1(P),3(EB),5(EA) Ports}
0.5
52-SY9220-L-0302
23
5EA 1P 3EB
49.8
0.5
0.3 mm 2
(For E type)
51.5
46
42
36.6
16.7
Ø 1.55
10
2-Ø 4.4 24.9 (12)
(Mounting holes)
L 194.2
6.5
18.4
Insulation
Black(-)
4A 2B

Red(+) 33.6 3-Ø 3.2
(Mounting holes for manifold)
64.2
2-1/4",3/8"
{4(A),2(B) Port}

52-SY9220-LL-0203
Insulation: Red(+)
Ø 4.1
16.7
0.3 mm 2
L 184
(Lead wire length)
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY9220-TT-02 03
Lead wire marking

No.1(+), No.2(-)
14
0.75 mm 2
L 217.6
(Lead wire length)
Max.10
10
Dimensions
Body ported type
3-position closed centre/exhaust centre/pressure centre
113.6
3 3-1/4"
52-SY9420-L-02 03
{1(P),3(EB),5(EA) Ports}
0.5
5
23
5EA 1P 3EB
0.5
49.8
0.3 mm2
(For E type)
51.5
46
42
36.6
16.7
Ø 1.55
10
2-Ø 4.4
24.9 (12)
(Mounting holes)
L 210.7
6.5
Insulation
Black(-)
4A 2B
18.4

Red(+) 33.6 3-Ø 3.2
(Mounting holes for manifold)
64.2
2-1/4",3/8"
{4(A),2(B) Port}

3 (108.5)
52-SY9420-LL-02 03
5
Ø 4.1
Insulation: Red(+)
16.7
0.3 mm2
L 201
(Lead wire length)
Terminal type (TT)

3
52-SY9420-TT-02 03
(125.3)
Lead wire marking

No.1(+), No.2(-)
14
0.75 mm 2
L 234.1
(Lead wire length) Max.10
11
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Base mounted type
2-position single
Plug connector type (L) L
66.5 (For E type)

(Lead wire length)
52-SY5140(R)-L-02
0.3 mm 2
Ø 1.55
22
9.5
18 18
5-1/4"
28 (Piping ports)
2-Ø 4.3 60.3 37.2
(Mounting holes)
M5 x 0.8 15.5 48 8.3 15.5
Manual override
4
(External pilot port)
Insulation
A B
17.5
Black(-)
A B
35
PE
X Insulation
EA P EB
Red(+)
17 56 4.3 17
62.5 65 M5 x 0.8
(Pilot EXH. port)
109.1 <For external pilot type>
18 19
9.5

52-SY5140(R)-LL-02
L 104
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
0.3 mm 2
Ø 4.1
37.2
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY5140(R)-TT-02 Max.10
L 120.8
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
2
0.75 mm
Ø 5.9
34.5
12
Dimensions
Base mounted type
2-position double
L
66.5 (For E type)

(Lead wire length)
52-SY5240(R)-L-02
Ø 1.55
0.3mm 2
22
9.5
18 18
2-Ø 4.3 28 5-1/4" 37.2
(Mounting holes) (Piping ports)
M5 x 0.8 15.5 48 4 15.5
(External pilot port) Manual override
4
Insulation
A B
17.5
17.5
Black(-)
A
35
B
X Insulation PE
EA P EB
Red(+)
17
17 56
M5 x 0.8
62.5 65.4 (Pilot EXH. port)
<For external pilot type>
153.6
18 19
9.5

52-SY5240(R)-LL-02
L 143.4
Insulation: Red(+) (Lead wire length)
0.3 mm2
Ø 4.1
37.2
(71.7)
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY5240(R)-TT-02
Max.10
L 177
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
0.75 mm 2
Ø 5.9
34.5
(88.5)
13
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Base mounted type
3-position closed centre/exhaust centre/ 18 19
pressure centre
9.5
3
52-SY5440(R)-L-02
5
2-Ø 4.3 37.2

(Mounting holes)
M5 x 0.8 15.5 48 4 15.5
(External pilot port) Manual override
4
Insulation
Black(-) A B
17.5
17.5
A
35
B
X
PE
Insulation EA P EB
Red(+) 17
17 56
M5 x 0.8
62.5 78 44.1 (Pilot EXH. port)
166.2
L
(Lead wire length)
66.5 (For E type)
0.3 mm2
Ø 1.55
22
9.5
18 18
5-1/4" 28
(Piping ports) 89.4

3
52-SY5440(R)-LL-02
5 L 156
Insulation: Red(+) (Lead wire length)
0.3 mm2
Ø 4.1
37.2
84.3
Terminal type (TT)

3
52-SY5440(R)-TT-02 Max.10
5 L 189.6
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
0.75 mm 2
Ø 5.9
34.5
101.1
14
Dimensions
Base mounted type

2-position single
Plug connector type (L) L
71.2 (For E type)

52-SY7140(R)-L-02 (Lead wire length)
0.3 mm 2
Ø 1.55
26.5
11.5
13.5
5-3/8",1/4" 20.5 20.5
(Piping ports) 33
79.2
41.7
61 10.4
21 2-Ø 4.3 21.5
(Mounting holes)
4
M5 x 0.8 Manual override
(External pilot port) Insulation
A B
Black(-)
23
A PE
38
46
B
X
Insulation EA P EB
Red(+)
21.5 69 6.4 21
67.2 123.3
21 22.5 M5 x 0.8
(Pilot EXH. port)

52-SY7140(R)-LL-02
L 118.2
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
0.3 mm 2
Ø 4.1
41.7
Terminal type (TT)

52-SY7140(R)-TT-02 Max.10
L 135
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
0.75 mm 2
Ø 5.9
39
15
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Base mounted type

2-position double
71.2 (For E type)

L
03
52-SY7240(R)-L- 02 (Lead wire length)
Ø 1.55
0.3 mm 2
26.5
13.5
11.5
5-3/8",1/4" 20.5 20.5
(Piping ports) 33
61 4 41.7
2-Ø 4.3
21 (Mounting holes) 21.5
4
Insulation
A B
23
23
Black(-)
PE
A
38
46
B
X
Insulation EA P EB
Red(+)
21.5 69 21
67.2 79.6 M5 x 0.8
(Pilot EXH. port)
21 22.5
13.5

03
52-SY7240(R)-LL- 02
L 157.6
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
0.3 mm 2
Ø 4.1
41.7
(78.8)
Terminal type (TT)

03
52-SY7240(R)-TT- 02 Max.10
L 191.2
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
0.75 mm 2
Ø 5.9
39
(95.6)
16
Dimensions
Base mounted type
3-position closed centre/
71.2 (For E type)

L
(Lead wire length)
exhaust centre/
pressure centre
Ø 1.55
2
0.3 mm
26.5
3
52-SY7440(R)-L- 0203
13.5
11.5
20.5 20.5
5 5-3/8",1/4"
(Piping ports) 33
96.9
61 4 41.7
2-Ø 4.3
21 (Mounting holes) 21.5
4
Insulation
A B
23
23
Black(-)
PE
A
38
46
B
X
Insulation EA P EB
Red(+)
21.5 69 21
67.2 92.6 44.1 M5 x 0.8
(Pilot EXH. port)
21 22.5 13.5

3
03
52-SY7440(R)-LL- 02
5
L 170.6
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
0.3 mm2
Ø 4.1
41.7
91.8
Terminal type (TT)

3
03
52-SY7440(R)-TT- 02 Max.10
L 204.2
5 (Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
Ø 5.9
0.75 mm 2
39
108.6
17
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Base mounted type
Dimensions/Series 52-SY9000 L
80.5 (For E type)

2-position single (Lead wire length)
Plug connector type (L) 0.3 mm
Ø 1.55
2
03
52-SY9140(R)-L-04
34
17.5
15.5
29.5 29.5
5-3/8",1/2"
44.5
(Piping ports)
109.3
86.5 16.8 51.2
2-Ø 5.4 25
27
1/8" Manual override (Mounting holes)
5
Insulation A4 B2
28.5
Black(-) PE
47
57
A B
X Insulation
Red(+) 5EA 1P 3EB
25 96.5 11.8 27
1/8"
76.5 153.4
(Pilot EXH. port)
29 30 <For external pilot type>
17.5

03
52-SY9140(R)-LL-04
L 148.3
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
0.3 mm 2
Ø 4.1
51.2
Terminal type (TT)

04
52-SY9140(R)-TT-03
Max.10
L 165.1
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
0.75 mm 2
Ø 5.9
48.5
18
Dimensions
Base mounted type
80.5 (For E type)

L
2-position double (Lead wire length)
Ø 1.55
0.3 mm 2
52-SY9240(R)-L-0403
34
17.5
15.5
29.5 29.5
5-3/8",1/2"
44.5
(Piping ports)
106
86.5 51.2
2-Ø 5.4 25
27
5
Insulation 4A 2B
28.5
Black(-) PE
47
57
A B
X Insulation
Red(+) 5EA 1P 3EB
25 96.5 27
1/8"
76.5 194.2
(Pilot EXH. port)
29 30 17.5 <For external pilot type>

03
52-SY9240(R)-LL-04
L 184
(Lead wire length)
Insulation: Red(+)
0.3 mm 2
Ø 4.1
51.2
(92)
Terminal type (TT)

04
52-SY9240(R)-TT-03 Max.10
L 217.6
(Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
0.75 mm 2
Ø 5.9
48.5
(108.8)
19
Series 52-SY
Dimensions
Base mounted type
3-position closed centre/ L
(Lead wire length)
80.5 (For E type)

exhaust centre/
pressure centre 0.3 mm 2
Ø 1.55
3
34
17.5
03
52-SY9440(R)-L-04
15.5
5 29.5 29.5
5-3/8",1/2"
44.5
(Piping ports)
113.6
123
86.5 51.2
2-Ø 5.4 25
27
5
Insulation A4 B2
28.5
Black(-) PE
47
57
A B
X Insulation
Red(+) 5EA 1P 3EB
25 96.5 69.1 27
1/8"
76.5 210.7
(Pilot EXH. port)
29 30 17.5

3
03
52-SY9440(R)-LL-04
5 L
(Lead wire length)
200
Insulation: Red(+)
0.3 mm 2
Ø 4.1
51.2
108
Terminal type (TT)

3
04
52-SY9440(R)-TT-03 Max.10
L 234.1
5 (Lead wire length)
Lead wire marking
No.1(+), No.2(-)
0.75 mm2
Ø 5.9
48.5
125.3
20
ATEX Compliant
Pilot Operated 5-Port Solenoid Valve
50-VFE3000-X60 Series
50-VFE5000-X60 Series
II 2G Ex db IIC T5 Gb Ta:ï10°C TO +50°C
II 2G Ex db IIC T6 Gb Ta:ï10°C TO +40°C
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T100°C Db Ta:ï10°C TO +50°C
II 2D Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db Ta:ï10°C TO +50°C
IP6X
[Certification no.: KEMA09ATEX0024X]
Specifications
Series 50-VFE3000-X60 50-VFE5000-X60
Fluid Air
Pilot Air Exhaust Port
Operating 2-position single/3-position 0.15 to 0.9 MPa (PE Port)
pressure range 2-position double 0.1 to 0.9 MPa There is a pilot air exhaust port (PE port) at the
Ambient and fluid temperatures T5: ï°C to 50 °C T6: ï°C to 40 °C bottom of all pilot valves, excluding the common
2-position single/double 45 ms or less∗1 45 ms or less∗1 exhaust type.
Response time
3-position 60 ms or less∗1 70 ms or less∗1 Please refrain from blocking this port as failure
Max. operating 2-position single/double 1 Hz 1 Hz to do so may result in valve malfunction.
frequency 3-position 1 Hz
In addition, if there is a possibility that the
1 Hz
hazard classification will change due to the
Lubrication Not required
exhaust air, be sure to connect piping to this
Manual override Non-locking push type, Push-turn locking type D
port and exhaust it to a safe location.
Mounting orientation Unrestricted
Individual exhaust, Individual exhaust
Pilot valve exhaust method
Main/Pilot valve common exhaust Pilot common exhaust Explosion Proof Precautions
∗1 Based on dynamic performance test, JIS B 8419: 2010. (0.5 MPa, at rated voltage.) 1) The zones of this valve are as follows.
Gas: Zone 1 or 2
Solenoid Specifications Dust: Zone 21 or 22
External wiring connection Flameproof threaded-joint metal conduit 2) The external ground cable has a 4 to 6.64
AC (5060 Hz) 100, 200, 12, 24, 48, 110, 220, 240 V mm2 conductor cross section, so be sure to
Coil rated voltage protect it from bending or excessive force.
DC 24, 6, 12, 48, 110 V
3) When using a cable gland, be sure to use a
Allowable voltage fluctuation –15 % to +10 % of rated voltage
product with ATEX certification.
Starting 9.1 VA (50 Hz) 7.8 VA (60 Hz)
Apparent power AC 4) Be sure to implement measures to prevent
Holding 6.2 VA (50 Hz) 4.6 VA (60 Hz) static electricity from charging the non-metal
Power consumption DC 3.5 W (Coil rated voltage: 6, 12, 24 V)∗2 parts on the external surface of the valve.
Coil Insulation type Class B 5) As air is also exhausted from the valve PE
∗2 The other voltage: 4 W port (pilot valve exhaust passage), be sure to
confirm whether this will affect the ambient
Option environment before use.
Description
6) Be sure to either use antistatic fittings or to
Part no. Applicable
implement static electricity prevention meas-
VF3000-16-1A 50-VFE33
Bracket (With mounting screw) ures.
VF5000-7-1A 50-VFE520
Option
Port size Flow rate characteristics∗3
1 → 4/2 (P → A/B) 4/2 → 5/3 (A/B → R1/R2) ∗5
Valve model∗4 Type of actuation 1, 4, 2 5, 3 Weight
(P, A, B) (R1, R2) C C kg
b Cv b Cv
[dm3/(s/bar)] [dm3/(s/bar)]
Single 3.0 0.38 0.78 2.8 0.30 0.67 0.85
2-position
Double 3.0 0.38 0.78 2.8 0.30 0.67 1.58
50-VFE330-01-X60 Closed center 1/8 2.4 0.31 0.64 1.8 0.37 0.46
3.0 0.32 0.76
3-position Exhaust center 2.6 0.37 0.70 [2.5] [0.28] [0.62] 1.67
3.0 0.42 0.83
Pressure center [1.4] [0.44] [0.39] 2.4 0.27 0.59
Single 4.0 0.36 1.0 3.1 0.32 0.75 0.85
2-position
Double 4.0 0.36 1.0 3.1 0.32 0.75 1.58
50-VFE330-02-X60 Closed center 1/4 1/8 2.4 0.45 0.68 1.9 0.37 0.47
3.1 0.36 0.79
5.5 0.37 1.4
Pressure center [1.4] [0.50] [0.40] 2.6 0.32 0.64
Single 7.1 0.46 1.9 7.7 0.51 2.2 1.01
2-position
Double 7.1 0.46 1.9 7.7 0.51 2.2 1.7
8.0 0.45 2.2
6.8 0.51 2.0
Pressure center [2.7] [0.50] [0.78] 5.7 0.37 1.4
Single 8.8 0.44 2.4 10.0 0.49 2.9 1.01
2-position
Double 8.8 0.44 2.4 10.0 0.49 2.9 1.7
10.0 0.48 3.0
9.2 0.50 2.6
Pressure center [3.0] [0.49] [0.85] 6.1 0.35 1.6
∗3 [ ]: denotes the normal position.
∗4 For the main/pilot valve common exhaust type, select 50-VFE333.
∗5 Weight for the flameproof threaded-joint metal conduit type
∗ As the product is body ported, it can be connected to a manifold base as is.
21
50-VFE3000/5000-X60 Series
Manifold
Manifold type
Model
Type EXH type A/B(CYL) port piping
30-
50-VFE3
-X60 01
−02 Type 30 Common Valve
40-
50-VFE3
-X60 B mount Type 40 Common Base
50-
50-VFE3
-X60 Type 50 Individual Base
NAMUR
90-
50-VFE3
-X60 Interface
Type 90 Individual Base
Type 20 Common Valve

20-
50-VFE5
−02
03-X60
B mount Type 21 Common Valve
44-
50-VFE5
-X60 Type 40 Common Base
∗ Select 50-VFE333 or 50-VFE343 for the main/pilot valve common exhaust type.
How to Order
50 VFE 3 1 3 0 5T M 02 F X60
Option
Explosion-proof — None
Flameproof, dustproof F With bracket
50 construction
∗ Avallable only for
50-VFE330/33 or 50-VFE520
Body type (The bracket will be shipped unattached.)
Body type, Applicable series
Symbol Thread type (Port size)
50-VFE3000 50-VFE5000
3 앬 — — Rc
5 — 앬 F G
N NPT
T NPTF
Symbol
1 Single solenoid Port size (P, A, B)
2 Double solenoid Applicable series
3 Closed center Symbol Port size
50-VFE3000 50-VFE5000
4 Exhaust center 40
5 Pressure center — None 50-VFE3 43
50
50-VFE544
30
01 1/8 50-VFE3 33 —
30
Body model 02 1/4 50-VFE3 33 50-VFE520
Applicable series 03 3/8 — 50-VFE520
Symbol Body model
50-VFE3000 50-VFE5000
2 Body ported (For manifold type 20) — 앬 Electrical Symbol
3 Body ported (For manifold type 30) 앬 — connection port 2-position 3-position
4 Base mounted (For manifold type 40) 앬 앬 Symbol Thread type Single Closed center
50-VFE3130 · 3133 50-VFE3330 · 3333
5 For manifold type 50 앬 — M M20 x 1.5 (B)2 4(A) (B)2 4(A)
N NPT1/2
(R2)3 1 5(R1) (R2)3 1 5(R1)
Body option Single
(P) (P)
Closed center
Applicable series Manual override 50-VFE3140 · 3143 · 3150 50-VFE3340 · 3343 · 3350
Symbol Body model 50-VFE5120 · 5144 50-VFE5320 · 5344
50-VFE3000 50-VFE5000 Non-locking push (A)4 2(B) (A)4 2(B)
30
— type
0 Standard 50-VFE3 40
50
50-VFE520 (R1)5 1 3(R2) (R1)5 1 3(R2)
Push-turn locking (P) (P)
Common exhaust type D type D Double Exhaust center

3∗1 for main and pilot valve 50-VFE3 33
43 —
(slotted type)
50-VFE3230 · 3233 50-VFE3430 · 3433
(B)2 4(A) (B)2 4(A)
Centralized piping type

4 for pilot exhaust
— 50-VFE544 (R2)3 1 5(R1) (R2)3 1 5(R1)
External wire connection (P) (P)
∗1 Semi-standard Double Exhaust center

Metal conduit threaded type 50-VFE3240 · 3243 · 3250 50-VFE3440 · 3443 · 3450
50-VFE5220 · 5244 50-VFE5420 · 5444
Rated voltage T Flameproof enclosure cable gland (A)4 2(B) (A)4 2(B)
AC (50/60 Hz) DC (not supplied) type∗2

1 100 VAC 5 24 VDC ∗2 Please use a commerclally (R1)5 1 3(R2)
(P)
(R1)5 1 3(R2)
(P)
2 200 VAC 6 12 VDC available cable gland with Pressure center

50-VFE3530 · 3533
3 110 VAC V 6 VDC ATEX certification if a product (B)2 4(A)
4 220 VAC Y 48 VDC is used as a flameproof

7 240 VAC Z 110 VDC enclosure cable gland type. (R2)3 1 5(R1)
(P)
8 48 VAC Pressure center

50-VFE3540 · 3543 · 3550
A 12 VAC 50-VFE5520 · 5544
(A)4 2(B)
B 24 VAC
(R1)5 1 3(R2)
(P)
22
ATEX Compliant
Pilot Operated 5-Port Solenoid Valve 50-VFE3000/5000-X60 Series
NAMUR Interface 5-Port Solenoid Valve How to Order
50 VFE3 1 90 5 T M 00F X60

Explosion-proof Option
Flameproof, dustproof Symbol Option
50 construction — Without spacer assembly
1 With spacer assembly
Symbol
1 Single solenoid
2 Double solenoid Pilot valve mounting position
(Single only)
Symbol Pilot valve mounting position
Rated voltage — Standard
AC (50/60 Hz) DC R Port 2(B) side
1 100 VAC 5 24 VDC
2 200 VAC 6 12 VDC
3 110 VAC V 6 VDC Thread type
4 220 VAC Y 48 VDC Symbol Thread type
7 240 VAC Z 110 VDC — Rc
8 48 VAC 00F G
A 12 VAC 00N NPT
B 24 VAC 00T NPTF
External wire connection Electrical connection port

Metal conduit threaded type Symbol Thread type
T Flameproof enclosure cable gland (not supplied) type∗1 M M20 x 1.5
∗1 Please use a commerclally available cable gland with ATEX N NPT1/2
certification if a product is used as a flameproof enclosure cable
gland type.
Manual override
— Non-locking push type
Push-turn locking type D
D (slotted type)
Symbol
2-position
Single Double
50-VFE3190-X60 50-VFE3290-X60
(A)4 2(B)
(A)4 2(B)
(R1)5 1 3(R2)
(P) (R1)5 1 3(R2)
(P)
50-VFE3190-R-X60
(A)4 2(B)
(R1)5 1 3(R2)
(P)
23
50-VFE3000/5000-X60 Series
50-VFE3000 Body Ported/2-Position Single
T(M, N)-
Metal conduit threaded type/50-VFE3130- (-F)-X60
Cover location securing screw Rotation

(Securable by every 90°) section
1/8" Cover
18.0 18.0
(R1, R2 port)
P
50.0
R1
PE
R2
8.0
2.0
30.5 M5 x 0.8 (PE port)
M: M20 x 1.5
71.2 (Plugged for 50-VFE3133)
N: NPT1/2
(Electrical connection port)
(1.5)
Terminal cover 47.5

<Label for explosion proof>
(Certification numbers) Terminal box
KEMA 09ATEX0024X
22G EX db 2C T6…T5 Gb <Product name plate>
(14.0)
22D EX tb 3C T85°C…100°C Db (6 x ø5.5) Rotation
120.7
67.6
LOCK (For mounting) section

Terminal box location securing screw
(Width across flats 2)
(49.0)
(59.0)
35.0
31.5
25.0
(31.5)
17.5
7.0
3.1
(14.0)
(5.0)
20.5
30.5
360° rotatable cover
2 x ø4.2 163.1
(25.7) ∗ Remove the cover location (2.0)
(For mounting bracket)
(50.7) securing screw before rotation. (12.5) 26.4
Manual portion
Manual override
Terminal cover mounting screw
Details of ( Press and turn

for the locking type. ) (Width across flats 3)
Terminal box rotation range
Manual Portion
Type D ∗ Remove the terminal box location
1/4", 1/8" (45.0) securing screw before rotation
(P, A, B port) 23.0
30
External ground terminal

LOCK
PUSH
0°
Ground terminal also available

1.0
in the terminal box

TURN
20.0
B A
F
E
"F" marking 15° <Warning label>

10.0
60
(Thread type)
°
2 x ø4.3
(For manifold mounting) Terminal box non rotatable range
Shape identification (External ground terminal area)

M: M20 x 1.5 N: NPT1/2
Bracket/VF3000-16-1
E
6 x ø5.5
20.5
(Bracket mounting hole)
Shape identification Shape identification
14
21
59
49
M20 x 1.5 NPT1/2 2 x ø4.3

(Electrical connection port) (Electrical connection port) (Bracket and valve
14
mounting hole)
2 (22.5)
5
2 x M4 x 0.7
Shape Shape 12.5 45
identification identification (Valve mounting
hole)
LOCK LOCK
Screw part number: AC00297 (M4 x 32, With spring washer)
∗ The shape identification is the same for the 50-VFE3000 and 5000.
24
ATEX Compliant
50-VFE3000 Body Ported/2-Pposition Double, 3-Position Closed Center, Exhaust Center, Pressure Center
30-
Metal conduit threaded type/50-VFE3 T(M, N)-
(-F)-X60
Cover location securing screw

(Securable by every 90°)
1/8" Rotation
(R1, R2 port) section
Cover
2.0
18.0 18.0
50.0
PE
R1
PE
R2
8.0
2.0
M5 x 0.8
<Label for explosion proof> (PE port)
40.7 40.7
(Certification numbers)
KEMA 09ATEX0024X (132.6)
22G EX db 2C T6…T5 Gb
22D EX tb 3C T85°C…100°C Db
M: M20 x 1.5
N: NPT1/2 265.2 (3-position: 287.2)
(1.5)
(Electrical connection port) 170.2 (3-position 192.2) (47.5)

Terminal box location Terminal cover
securing screw
(Width across flats 2) Terminal box
<Product name plate>
(14.0)
Rotation
120.7
7.0
67.6
LOCK section
(14.0)
(59.0)
(49.0)
35.0
31.5
25.0
3.1
17.5
2 x ø4.2 20.5 (6 x ø5.5)

(14.0)
(5.0)
(2.0)
(For mounting bracket) (For mounting)
(12.5)
(25.7)
Manual override
(50.7)

Terminal box non rotatable range Manual portion
( Press and turn for
the locking type. )
∗ Remove the cover location securing
screw before rotation. Details of (Width across flats 3)
Manual Portion (45.0) Terminal box rotation range
Type D 23.0 ∗ Remove the terminal box location
securing screw before rotation
26.4
30
(6
10.0
0°
LOCK
PUSH
0°
)
TURN
B A
F
E
E
1.0

15
20.0
1/4", 1/8" ° Ground terminal also available

60
in the terminal box

°
(P, A, B port)
2 x ø4.3 <Warning label>
(For manifold mounting)
Terminal box non rotatable range
"F" marking
(Thread type)
25
50-VFE3000/5000-X60 Series
T
NAMUR Interface/50-VFE3190- (M, N)-
-
-X60
Terminal box rotation range Details of Manual Portion
∗ Remove the terminal box location Type D
securing screw before rotation PUSH TURN
Terminal cover mounting screw LOCK

Ground terminal also available in the terminal box
Terminal box <Warning label>
27.5 0°
30
47.5

M5 x 0.8 (Certification numbers)
60 15°
(PE port) KEMA 09ATEX0024X
163.1
Rotation 25.0 PE ° 22D EX tb 3C T85°C…100°C Db
2.0
section Terminal box
(95.7)
14
non rotatable range

5
71.2
34.8
56.5

1
Cover
3
12
Manual
Rc1/8 portion Manual override
12.2
Terminal box location 20.0 28.2

securing screw
40.0
<Product
37.5
(3, 5 port)
ø1
9.5 Rotation
the locking type. )
name plate> ø5.5 depth 3 section (3.2)
M: M20 x 1.5
N: NPT1/2
12.0
∗ Remove the cover location securing Rc1/4 37.5

(Electrical
4
screw before rotation. (1 port)
24.0
50.0
connection port)
32.5
30.5
Terminal
2
M5 x 46
(28.2)
cover (Cap bolt)

53.2
LOCK
(4 port) 15.0
5.5
(2 port) 28.2
67.6 25.0 4.0 32.0 2.4 41.4 7.2
(1.5) 120.7
T
NAMUR Interface/50-VFE3190- (M, N)-R
-X60 Details of Manual Portion
Type D
LOCK
(1.5) 120.7 360° rotatable cover

67.6 25.0 ∗ Remove the cover location TURN PUSH
securing screw before rotation. 2.4 41.4

(4 port) 28.2
Terminal
5.5
4.0 32.0 15.0 7.2

53.2
LOCK
cover
(28.2)
37.5
28.5
30.5
4
24.0
50.0
12.0
Rc1/4 M5 x 46
2

ø19 (1 port) (Cap bolt)
M: M20 x 1.5 (Width across flats 2) .5
N: NPT1/2 ø5.5 depth 3 (3.2)
Terminal box non rotatable range (2 port) Manual
(Electrical connection port) Rotation
Rc1/8 portion section
40.0 37.5
(3, 5 port) Cover
14.0
20.0 28.2
<Product M5 x 0.8
name plate> (PE port) Manual override
14
5

)
56.5
34.8
71.0
(Securable by every 90°) the locking type.

1
(95.7) 25.0
3
12
25.0 (Width across flats 3)
Rotation section 2.0
163.1
PE
Terminal box
15 0°
6
°
<Warning
label>
47.5
27.5 30 E
0°
<Label for explosion proof> External ground terminal

(Certification numbers) Ground terminal also available in the terminal box
KEMA 09ATEX0024X
22G EX db 2C T6…T5 Gb Terminal box rotation range
22D EX tb 3C T85°C…100°C Db ∗ Remove the terminal box location securing screw before rotation
26
ATEX Compliant
50-VFE5000 Body Ported/2-Position Single

T(M, N)-
Metal conduit threaded type/50-VFE5120- (-F)-X60
Details of Cover location securing screw

Manual Portion (Securable by every 90°) Rotation
Type D section Cover
3/8", 1/4" 26.0 26.0
(Piping port)
LOCK
PUSH
3 R2 1P 5 R1
50.0
PE
TURN
2.0
50.5
M: M20 x 1.5 M5 x 0.8
107.2 (PE port)
N: NPT1/2

(1.5)
(Certification numbers) Terminal cover 47.5

KEMA 09ATEX0024X
22G EX db 2C T6…T5 Gb Terminal box
(14.0)
Terminal box location securing screw <Product name plate>
Rotation section
120.7
67.6
LOCK
(68.0)
(78.0)
45.0
36.0
(14.0)
40.0
22.5
25.0
(39.0)
4.5
3.1
27.0 (6 x ø5.5)
(5.0)
(26.0)
(For mounting) (2.0)
50.5
360° rotatable cover (10.0) 32.0
∗ Remove the cover location securing screw before rotation. 199.1
3 x ø4.3 (51.0)
Manual portion
Bracket/VF5000-7-1 Terminal cover mounting screw
Manual override (Width across flats 3)
6 x ø5.5
27 (Press
the locking type. )
and turn for
∗ Remove the terminal box location
21
"F" marking (70.0) securing screw before rotation

30
0°
14
3 x M4 x 0.7 (Thread type)

78
68
36
(Valve mounting F
24.0
hole)
3.0
2B 4A
E
3 x ø4.3 External ground terminal

2 (35)
14
(Bracket and valve 2 x ø4.3 28.0 15 Ground terminal also available

10 70 °
60
mounting hole) (For mounting) in the terminal box

°
44.0
<Warning label>
Screw part number: VF5000-17-1(M4 x 37, With spring washer) Terminal box non rotatable range
27
50-VFE3000/5000-X60 Series
2
Metal conduit threaded type/50-VFE5 -
T(M, N)-
(-F)-X60
Details of 1/4", 3/8" Cover location securing screw

Manual Portion (Piping port) (Securable by every 90°)
Rotation
Type D section Cover
26.0 26.0
2.0
LOCK
PUSH
50.0 3 R2 1P 5 R1
PE
TURN
PE
2.0
M5 x 0.8
56.7 56.7
(PE port)
(148.6)

(Certification numbers)
KEMA 09ATEX0024X
M: M20 x 1.5
N: NPT1/2
297.2 (3-position: 327.2)
(1.5)
Terminal box location 202.2 (3-position: 232.2) (47.5)

securing screw
(Width across flats 2) Terminal cover
Terminal box
(14.0)
<Product name plate>

Rotation section
120.7
67.6
36.0
LOCK
(68.0)
45.0
(78.0)
40.0
(14.0)
22.5
25.0
4.5
3.1
(5.0)
(2.0) 3 x ø4.3 27.0 (6 x ø5.5)

(For mounting bracket) (For mounting)
(10.0)
(26.0)
(51.0)

∗ Remove the cover location securing screw before rotation. Manual override Manual portion
Terminal box non rotatable range ( Press and turn for

the locking type. ) Terminal cover mounting screw
"F" marking Terminal box rotation range
(Thread type) ∗ Remove the terminal box location
securing screw before rotation
30
(70.0)
(6
0°
0°
)
F
2B 4A
E

28.0 15 Ground terminal also available
32.0
3.0
24.0
°
60
in the terminal box

°
44.0
<Warning label>
2 x ø4.3
(For mounting) Terminal box non rotatable range
28
ATEX Compliant
Pilot Operated 3-Port Solenoid Valve
50-VPE500/700-X60 Series
II 2G Ex db II& T5 Gb Ta:ï10°&TO +50°&
II 2G Ex db II& T Gb Ta:ï10°&TO +40°&
II 2D Ex tb III&7°& Db Ta:ï10°& TO +50°&
II 2D Ex tb III&7°& Db Ta:ï10°& TO +50°&
,3;
>&HUWLILFDWLRQQR KEMA09ATEX0024X]
Specifications
Fluid Air Pilot Air Exhaust Port
Type of actuation 1&RU12&RQYHUWLEOH (PE Port)
Pilot type Internal pilot External pilot There is a pilot air exhaust port (PE port) at the
ï.2 kPa to bottom of all pilot valves, excluding the common
Supply pressure exhaust type.
0.8 MPa
Operating pressure range 0.2 to 0.8 MPa Please refrain from blocking this port as failure
External pilot to do so may result in valve malfunction.
0.2 to 0.8 MPa
pressure In addition, if there is a possibility that the
Ambient and fluid temperatures 7ï&WR&7ï&WR& hazard classification will change due to the
exhaust air, be sure to connect piping to this
Response time 45 ms or less (at 0.5 MPa)∗1
port and exhaust it to a safe location.
Max. operating frequency 1 Hz
Explosion Proof Precautions
Non-locking push type
Manual override 1) The zones of this valve are as follows.
Push-turn locking type D Gas: Zone 1 or 2
Mounting orientation Unrestricted Dust: Zone 21 or 22
2) 7KHH[WHUQDOJURXQGFDEOHKDVDWR
∗1 Based on dynamic performance test, JIS B 8419: 2010. (0.5 MPa, at rated voltage.)
mm2 conductor cross section, so be sure to
protect it from bending or excessive force.
Solenoid Specifications 3) When using a cable gland, be sure to use a
External wiring connection Flameproof threaded-joint metal conduit product with ATEX certification.
$&50 Hz) 100, 200, 12, 24, 48, 110, 220, 240 V 4) Be sure to implement measures to prevent
&RLOUDWHGYROWDJH static electricity from charging the non-metal
'& 9 parts on the external surface of the valve.
Allowable voltage fluctuation –15 % to +10 % of rated voltage 5) As air is also exhausted from the valve PE
port (pilot valve exhaust passage), be sure to
&RLO,QVXODWLRQW\SH &ODVV%
confirm whether this will affect the ambient
Starting 9$+]9$+] environment before use.
Apparent power $&
Holding 9$+]9$+] Be sure to either use antistatic fittings or to
implement static electricity prevention meas-
Power consumption '& :&RLOUDWHGYROWDJH9∗2 ures.
∗2 The other voltage: 4 W
Option
Description Part no. Applicable
VP500-27-3A 50-VPE542
Bracket (With mounting screw)
VP700-27-2A 50-VPE742
Flow Rate Characteristics

Flow rate characteristics
∗3
Port Weight
Piping Model 1 → 2 (P → A) 2 → 3 (A → R) 3 → 2 (R → A) 2 → 1 (A → P)
size kg
&>GP3/(s·bar)] b &Y &>GP3/(s·bar)] b &Y &>GP3/(s·bar)] b &Y &>GP3/(s·bar)] b &Y
1/4 0.35 7.4 0.41 2.0 0.34 1.7 7.5 0.42 2.0
50-VPE542--02
03 -X60 1.0
Body 3/8 9.1 0.42 2.4 9 0.43 2.4 8.8 2.2 9.3 0.43 2.5
ported 3/8 12 0.29 2.9 12 3.1 12 0.31 3.1
13 3.4
50-VPE742--03
04 -X60 1.28
1/2 15 0.23 3.8 14 0.25 3.8 15 0.22 3.7 0.29 4
∗3 Weight for the flameproof threaded-joint metal conduit type
29
How to Order
50 VPE 5 4 2 5 T D M 02 A F X60
Explosion-proof Option
Flameproof, dustproof — None
50 construction F With bracket
∗ The bracket will be shipped
Body type unattached.
Body type, Applicable series
Symbol
50-VFE500 50-VFE700
5 앬 — Symbol
7 — 앬 A Normally closed
B Normally open
Type of valve actuation

4 In common between N.C. and N.O. (Pilot type) Thread type (Port size)
— Rc
F G
Body model N NPT
2 Body ported T NPTF
Body option Port size (P, A, B)

— Standard (Internal pilot) Applicable series
Symbol Port size
R External pilot 50-VFE500 50-VFE700
02 1/4 앬 —
03 3/8 앬 앬
Rated voltage 04 1/2 — 앬
AC (50/60 Hz) DC
1 100 VAC 5 24 VDC
2 200 VAC 6 12 VDC Electrical connection port
3 110 VAC V 6 VDC Symbol Thread type
4 220 VAC Y 48 VDC M M20 x 1.5
7 240 VAC Z 110 VDC N NPT1/2
8 48 VAC
A 12 VAC
B 24 VAC Manual overrid
— Non-locking push type
D Push-turn locking type D (slotted type)
Symbol
Type N.C N.O External wire connection
2(A) 2(A) Metal conduit threaded type
Internal
T Flameproof enclosure cable gland (not supplied) type∗1
pilot ∗1 Please use a commerclally available cable gland with ATEX
(Standard) certification if a product is used as a flameproof enclosure cable
(R)3 1(P) (R)3 1(P)
gland type.
Universal 2(A)
External
pilot (R)3 1(P)
30
ATEX Compliant
Pilot Operated 3-Port Solenoid Valve 50-VPE500/700-X60 Series
Body Ported/50-VPE500
T(M, N)-
Metal conduit threaded type/50-VPE542(R)- (-F)-X60

Details of "F" marking
Manual Portion (Thread type) Rotation
section Cover
Type D 3/8", 1/4"
(Piping port)
LOCK
PUSH
50.0
PE
3R 1P
7.0
TURN
2.0
26.1 30.7 M5 x 0.8
(PE port)
92.4
M: M20 x 1.5
N: NPT1/2
(1.5)
Terminal cover 47.5

(4 x ø6.3)
<Label for explosion proof> (For mounting) 41.6 22.0
(Certification numbers) Rotation
120.7
KEMA 09ATEX0024X
67.6
LOCK
section
(83.0)
(70.0)
45.0
40.5
28.0
25.0
22.5
(41.5)
2 x ø4.2
3.1

4.5
(26.0) (2.0)
(6.5)
(19.0)
(51.0) (52.0) (8.0)

(10.0) 32.0
(1.1) (68.0)
360° rotatable cover 184.3
screw before rotation. Manual portion
Manual override
1/8"
<For external pilot>
(Press and turn for
the locking type. )
2 x ø4.2 79.7 ∗ Remove the terminal box location
(For mounting) 26.1 31.0 securing screw before rotation
30

0°
3.5
Ground terminal also available

NO
26.0
2A in the terminal box

E
X
X
NC
<Warning label>
3.5
F
41.6 60 15°
Switching mark ° Terminal cover mounting screw
"F" marking (Width across flats 3)
(Thread type) Terminal box non rotatable range
Shape identification (External ground terminal area)
M: M20 x 1.5 N: NPT1/2
Bracket/VP500-27-3
4 x ø4.5
(Bracket and valve mounting hole)
E
22 22
4 x M4 x 0.7
6.9 6.9 (Valve mounting hole)
Shape identification Shape identification
M20 x 1.5 NPT1/2

54
20
36
70
83
(Electrical connection port) (Electrical connection port)
Shape Shape
identification identification 2 52
4 x ø6.5
10 68 (Bracket mounting hole)
LOCK LOCK
Screw part number: AC00031 (M4 x 38, With spring washer)
∗ The shape identification is the same for the 50-VPE500 and 700.
31
Body Ported/50-VPE700
T(M, N)-
Metal conduit threaded type/50-VPE742(R)- (-F)-X60
Details of
Manual Portion Cover location securing screw
Type D (Securable by every 90°)
Rotation
LOCK
1/2", 3/8" section Cover
PUSH
TURN (Piping port)
50.0
PE
3R 1P
9.0
2.0
30.5 42.0
118.2 M5 x 0.8
(PE port)
M: M20 x 1.5
N: NPT1/2
(1.5)
Terminal cover 47.5

(4 x ø6.5)
51.5 31.0
<Label for explosion proof> (For mounting)
(Certification numbers) Rotation
120.7
67.6
section
LOCK KEMA 09ATEX0024X
(104.0)
(88.0)
63.0
56.5
38.5
(31.5)
25.0
(52.0)
2 x ø5.2
6.5

5.5
(30.0)
(8.0)
(20.5)
(70.0) (10.0) (2.0)

(55.0) (0.5) (90.0) (10.0) 40.0
360° rotatable cover 210.1
screw before rotation.
Manual portion
1/8" Manual override
<For external pilot> ( Press and turn for
the locking type. )
99.5
"F" marking Terminal box rotation range
31.0 41.0
(Thread type) ∗ Remove the terminal box location
2 x ø5.2 securing screw before rotation
30
3.5
0°

F Ground terminal also available
NO
33.0
2A in the terminal box

E
NC
X
F
4.5
51.5 60 15° <Warning label>

°
Switching mark Terminal cover mounting screw
"F" marking (Width across flats 3)
(Thread type) Terminal box non rotatable range
Bracket/VP700-27-2
4 x ø5.5
(Bracket and valve mounting hole) 4 x M5 x 0.8
31 31 (Valve mounting hole)
4 x ø6.5
6 6
104
72
25
52
88
2 70
10 90
Screw part number: AA00115 (M5 x 48, With spring washer)
32
Specific Product Precautions
Precautions on 50-VPE500/50-VPE700
Piping External Pilot Change of Actuation

If the P port size of this valve is excessively Use external pilot type in the following cases: It is possible to switch this valve between
reduced, a malfunction may occur due to the ¡For vacuum or for low pressure 0.2 MPa or normally closed (N.C.) and normally open (N.O.).
resulting pressure drop. We recommend using a less
size 10 or larger (fitting inner diameter) for the ¡When having P port downsized in diameter
Body ported
End plate End plate
50-VPE542 and a size 12 or larger (fitting inner ¡When using A por t as the atmospher ic N.C N.O
Body Body
diameter) for the 50-VPE742, with a piping releasing port, e.g. air blower
length of 3 m or less. In addition, when the P
port size is reduced, please use an external pilot
type valve. When changing the actuation from normally
closed type to normally open type, remove the
body from the sub-plate and reset the “” mark
Special Applications on the body corresponding to the “NO” mark on
It can’ t be used in special applications such as the sub-plate as shown in the above.
using as a non-leakage valve. Refer to the following table for piping.
Port
P A R
Actuation
N.C Inlet Outlet Exhaust side
N.O Exhaust side Outlet Inlet
Pag. 63, 71, 74

Pag. 128
Grease for food processing equipment
Semi-standard
Symbol Specifications
— Standard product
Pag. 67, 77, 79 Pressure unit on the product name label: psi
Z Pressure unit on the pressure gauge: MPa and psi
Made to Order
— Standard Pag. 142, 147
Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut, etc.
XC7 Note) The manifold type is not available with ATEX certification
made of stainless steel
Pag. 112
Pag. 96
∗1 Refer to the applicable internal circuit diagram (numbers q to e) on page 112.
Made to order
— Standard ∗ This category 3 type auto switch can only be used in zones 2 and 22.
XB11 Long stroke type
XC22 Fluoro rubber seals. Only for Ø 25 Pag. 122, 124
∗ F: Except size 40
Pag. 111 Symbol Single vane Double vane
Reed Auto Switch
No. q w e
2-wire (Reed switch) 2-wire (Reed switch) 2-wire (Reed switch)
Internal Circuit
Brown Brown Brown

protection circuit
protection circuit
protection box
Indicator Load Load Indicator Load

Contact
Contact
Contact
circuit circuit
Blue Blue Blue
Pag. 151, 157, 165

Note) For temperature classification, refer to the specifications.
Specifications
Ambient temperature range
Low temperature Standard High temperature All other specifications are the same as the
Classification
55-IP500-L- 55-IP500-- 55-IP500-T- standard products Series IP5000/5100.
Pag. 161
Note 3) For side mounting, select “-W” and check the control position by viewing the LCD display value.
33
ATEX Compliant
5-Port Solenoid Valve Manifold with M- or T- kit
Series 56-VQC1000
II 3G Ex nA IIB T5 Gc
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T80°C Dc
Note) Refer to Serial transmission system on page 30 for the S kit.
How to Order Manifolds
56 - VV5QC 1 1 08 C3 TD0 N ...... M

F / T / S Kit
ATEX category 3 L
Series
1 56-VQC1000
Manifold model
1 Plug-in unit Options
– None
Stations B All stations with back pressure check valve
01 1 station D With DIN rail (rail length: standard)
D With DIN rail (rail length: special)
Special wiring specifications
K (except for double wiring)
The minimum or the maximum
N With name plate
number of stations differs
depending on the electrical R External pilot
entry (refer to Electrical
entry/Cable length).
Cylinder port size COM.

C3 With Ø 3.2 One-touch fitting
N Negative COM.
C4 With Ø 4 One-touch fitting
M5 M5 thread
CM Mixed sizes and with port plug
L3 Top ported elbow wtih Ø 3.2 One-touch fitting
L4 Top ported elbow with Ø 4 One-touch fitting
L6 Top ported elbow with Ø 6 One-touch fitting
L5 M5 thread
LM Elbow port, mixture sizes
B3 Bottom ported elbow with Ø 3.2 One-touch fitting
B4 Bottom ported elbow with Ø 4 One-touch fitting
B6 Bottom ported elbow with Ø 6 One-touch fitting
B5 M5 thread
BM Elbow for bottom port, mixture sizes
Kit designation/Electrical entry/Cable length
M Kit
(Multiple connector kit) T Kit
(Terminal block box kit) S Kit
(Serial output kit)
00
EX5
series
upto 24 solenoid coils

MD0 Multiple connector kit (26P) without cable upto 16 solenoid coils
MD1 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 1.5 m cable 1 to 12 stations upto 20 solenoid coils SI unit: 56-EX500
MD2 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 3.0 m cable (24 stations)
1 to 10 stations Serial kit for 1 to 8 stations
TD0 Terminal block box kit (20 stations) SDA2 (16 stations)
MD3 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 5.0 m cable PROFIBUS DP
Contact SMC for 56-EX250 with Profibus DP
The maximum number of stations displayed in parentheses is applied to the special wiring specifications. (Option “-K”)
The maximum number of stations is determined by the total number of solenoids. (Single solenoid type: 1 point, Double solenoid type: 2 points)
Make sure that the total number of solenoids does not exceed the maximum number of stations. Additionally, when combining with option parts,
make sure that the maximum number of stations is not exceeded.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series VQC.
For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
34
Series 56-VQC Base-Mounted Type Plug-in Unit
How to Order Valves
56 - VQC 1 1 0 0 5
Manual override
ATEX – : Non-locking
category 3 push type
Series
Coil voltage
1 56-VQC1000
5 24 V DC
B: Locking type
(Slotted)
Function
Type of actuation – Standard type
1 2-position single R External pilot
2-position double (metal)
2
2-position double (rubber) C: Locking type
3 3-position closed centre (Manual)
Seal type
4 3-position exhaust centre
0 Metal seal
5 3-position pressure centre
1 Rubber seal
A Note) 4-position dual 3-port valve (A)
B Note) 4-position dual 3-port valve (B)
C Note) 4-position dual 3-port valve (C) D: Slide locking type
Note) ''56-'' solenoid valve should be installed in ''56-VV5QC11'' manifold. (Manual)
Note) For rubber seal type only. Power consumption when starting is 1W, when maintaining 0.35 W.
"56-VQC" solenoid valve has no polarity
Specifications for 56-VQC 1000/2000 and 4000
Valve Configuration Metal seal Rubber seal

Fluid Air/Inert gas
56-VQC4000 56-VQC1000/2000
Max. operating pressure 0.7 MPa

Single 0.1 MPa 0.15 MPa
Min. operating Double 0.1 MPa
pressure
3-position 0.1 MPa 0.2 MPa
Valve specifications
4-position — 0.15 MPa

Single 0.15 MPa 0.2 MPa
Min. operating
pressure Double 0.15 MPa
3-position 0.15 MPa 0.2 MPa
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa
Fluid temperature –10 to 50 °C Note 1)
Manual override Push type/Locking type (tool required)/Locking type Note 2)/Slide locking type Note 2)
Impact resistance/Vibration resistance 150/30 m/s2 Note 3)
Enclosure Dust proof (conforms to IP67)
Rated coil voltage 24 V DC
specifications
Electrical
Allowable voltage fluctuation 10 % of rated voltage

Coil insulation type Equivalent to B type
Power consumption
24 V DC 1 W (42 mA) for inrush / 0.35 W (15 mA) for holding
(Current) Note4)
Note 1) Use dry air to prevent condensation at low temperatures.
Note 2) Only for 56-VQC1000/2000.
Note 3) Impact resistance: No malfunction resulted from the impact test using a drop impact tester. The test was performed one time each in the
axial and right angle directions of the main valve and armature, for both energised and de-energised states.
Vibration resistance: No malfunction occurred in a one-sweep test between 45 and 2000 Hz. Test was performed in the axial and right
angle directions of the main valve and armature for both energised and de-energised states.
Note 4) The power-saving unit is included in the manifold.
35
ATEX Compliant
56-VQC2000
Series
56 - VV5QC 2 1 08 C4 TD0 N ...... M

F / T / S Kit
Series
L
ATEX category 3
2 56-VQC2000
Manifold model
1 Plug-in unit Options
– None
B All stations with back pressure check valve
Stations
D With DIN rail (rail length: standard)
01 1 station
D With DIN rail (rail length: special)
The minimum or the maximum N With name plate
number of stations differs External pilot
R
depending on the electrical
entry (refer to Electrical T Branched P and R ports on U side
entry/Cable length).
Cylinder port size

COM.
N Negative COM.
L4 Top ported elbow With Ø 4 One-touch fitting
LM Elbow port, mixture sizes
B4 Bottom ported elbow With Ø 4 One-touch fitting
BM Elbow for bottom port, mixture sizes
M Kit
(Serial output kit)
0
EX50
series
upto 24 solenoid coils upto 16 solenoid coils

SI unit: 56-EX500
MD0 Multiple connector kit (26P) without cable
Note) A separate gateway unit and
MD1 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 1.5 m cable 1 to 12 stations upto 20 solenoid coils communication cable are required
MD2 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 3.0 m cable (24 stations) 1 to 10 stations Serial kit for 1 to 8 stations
TD0 Terminal block box kit (20 stations) SDA2 (16 stations)
MD3 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 5.0 m cable PROFIBUS DP
36
How to Order Valves
56 - VQC 2 1 0 0 5
Manual override
ATEX category 3 – : Non-locking
push type
Ø 4.2
Series Coil voltage

2 56-VQC2000 5 24 V DC
B: Locking type
(Slotted)
Ø 4.2
Function
– Standard type
Type of actuation External pilot
R
1 2-position single
2-position double (metal) C: Locking type
2 (Manual)
2-position double (rubber)
3 3-position closed centre 11mm
4 3-position exhaust centre

Seal type
A Note) 4-position dual 3-port valve (A) 0 Metal seal
B Note) 4-position dual 3-port valve (B) 1 Rubber seal
C Note) 4-position dual 3-port valve (C) D: Slide locking type
Note) For rubber seal type only. (Manual)
Ø2
OFF
ON
Note) ''56-'' solenoid valve should be installed in ''56-VV5QC21'' manifold.

Power consumption when starting is 1W, when maintaining 0.35 W.
"56-VQC" solenoid valve has no polarity
37
ATEX Compliant
56-VQC4000
Series
56 - VV5QC 4 1 08 02 TD0 N ...... M

F / T / S Kit
ATEX category 3 L
Series
4 56-VQC4000
Options
Manifold model
– None
1 Plug-in unit
Stations N With name plate (T kit only)
01 1 station
The maximum number of

stations differs depending on
the electrical entry (refer to
Electrical entry/Cable length).
COM.
N Negative COM.
Cylinder port size
02 1/4 thread
03 3/8 thread
B Bottom port 1/4
Thread type
– Rc
F G
N NPT
T NPTF
M Kit
(Serial output kit)
EX500
series
upto 24 solenoid coils

MD0 Multiple connector kit (26P) without cable upto 16 solenoid coils
MD1 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 1.5 m cable 1 to 12 stations upto 20 solenoid coils SI unit: 56-EX500
MD2 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 3.0 m cable (24 stations) 1 to 10 stations Serial kit for 1 to 8 stations
TD0 Terminal block box kit (20 stations) SDA2 PROFIBUS-DP (16 stations)
MD3 Multiple connector kit (26P) with 5.0 m cable
38
How to Order Valves
56 - VQC 4 1 0 0 5
Manual override
ATEX category 3 – : Non-locking
push type
Coil voltage
5 24 V DC
Series
4 56-VQC4000
Function
– Standard type
R External pilot B: Locking type
(Slotted)
Type of actuation
1 2-position single
2-position double (metal)
2 Seal type
2-position double (rubber)
3 3-position closed centre 0 Metal seal
4 3-position exhaust centre 1 Rubber seal
6 3-position perfect
Note) ''56-'' solenoid valve should be installed in ''56-VV5QC41'' manifold.

Power consumption when starting is 1W, when maintaining 0.35 W.
"56-VQC" solenoid valve has no polarity.
Options for 56-VQC
Name 56-VQC1000 56-VQC2000 56-VQC4000

Blanking plate assembly VVQ1000-10A-1 VVQ2000-10A-1 VVQ4000-10A-1
Individual SUP spacer VVQ1000-P-1-C6 VVQ2000-P-1-C8 VVQ4000-P-1-
Individual EXH spacer VVQ1000-R-1-C6 VVQ2000-R-1-C8 VVQ4000-R-1-
SUP block plate VVQ1000-16A VVQ2000-16A VVQ4000-16A
EXH block plate – VVQ2000-19A VVQ4000-16A
EXH block base assembly VVQC1000-19A-- – –
Back pressure check valve VVQ1000-18A VVQ2000-18A –
Port plug VVQ0000-58A VVQ1000-58A –
Dual flow fitting assembly VVQ1000-52A-C8 VVQ2000-52A-C10 –
Elbow fitting assembly VVQ1000-F-L- VVQ2000-F-L- –
Port plug VVQ0000-58A VVQ1000-58A –
Blanking plug KQ2P- KQ2P- KQ2P-
DIN rail mounting bracket VVQ1000-57A(-S) VVQ2000-57A(-S) –
Name plate VVQ1000-N- VVQ2000-N- –

Notes) : Please refer to standard catalogues for details.
Do not use options other than specified in this table.
Only these standard parts without "56-" prefix can be used.
39
56-VQC1000
M Kit (Multiple Connector Kit)
56-VV5QC11
D SIDE STATIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 n U SIDE
2xC8:3(R)EXH.port
C8:One-touch fitting for Ø 8
DIN rail clamp screw
62.5
60
9.5
7.5
40.5
18.5
18
(12)
(7.5)
20.5
2nxC3,C4,C6,M5<4(A),2(B) Port>
P=10.5 34
C3:One-touch fitting for Ø 3.2 2xC8:1(P)SUP.port
C6:One-touch fitting for Ø 6 C8:One-touch fitting for Ø 8
M5:M5 Threads
(L4)
(L3) (5.25)
L2
72 L1
P=10.5 28 65
Manual override
1.5 1.5 (12) 13
Indicator light
93.5
(35)
66
75
(5.5)
(40)
=2
20
Power saving unit 4xM4 Mounting holes
Multi-connector cable assembly

AXT100-MC26-015: 1.5 m
AXT100-MC26-030: 3 m
AXT100-MC26-050: 5 m
Formulas
L1 = 10.5n + 45
L2 = 10.5n + 123 (1 power saving unit for 1 to 12 solenoids)
L2 = 10.5n + 144 (2 power saving units for 13 to 24 solenoids) n: Stations (Max. 24 single wire stations)
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
L1 55.5 66 76.5 87 97.5 108 118.5 129 139.5 150 160.5 171 181.5 192 202.5 213 223.5 234 244.5 255 265.5 276 286.5 297
L2 133.5 144 154.5 165 175.5 186 196.5 207 217.5 228 238.5 249 280.5 291 301.5 312 322.5 333 343.5 354 364.5 375 385.5 396
L3 162.5 175 175 187.5 200 212.5 225 237.5 237.5 250 262.5 275 300 312.5 325 337.5 350 362.5 375 375 387.5 400 412.5 425
L4 173 185.5 185.5 198 210.5 223 235.5 248 248 260.5 273 285.5 310.5 323 335.5 348 360.5 373 385.5 385.5 398 410.5 423 435.5
40
56-VQC1000
S Kit (Serial Transmission Kit) Decentralised Serial wiring
56-VV5QC11
SDA2 Kit (Serial Transmission Kit: 56-EX500)

C1(M12) 2xC8:3(R)EXH.port
C2(M12) C8:One-touch fitting for Ø 8
0 DIN rail clamp screw
62.5
1
60
40.5
25
18.5
7.5
9.5
(12)
(7.5)
20.5
2nxC3,C4,C6,M5<4(A),2(B) Port>
C3:One-touch fitting for Ø 3.2 P=10.5 34
C4:One-touch fitting for Ø 4 2xC8:1(P)SUP.port
M5:M5 Threads
(L4)
(L3) (5.25)
L2
63.5 L1
7 21 21 P=10.5 28
Manual override 65
1.5 1.5
Indicator light (12) 13
PWR
93.5
COM
(35)
75
66
(5.5)
(40)
EX500
series
=2
SI unit Power saving unit

=9
4xM4 Mounting holes
Formulas
L1 = 10.5n + 45
L2 = 10.5n + 114.5 (1 power saving unit for 1 to 12 solenoids)
L2 = 10.5n + 135.5 (2 power saving units for 13 to 16 solenoids) n: Stations (Max. 16 single wire stations)
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L1 55.5 66 76.5 87 97.5 108 118.5 129 139.5 150 160.5 171 181.5 192 202.5 213
L2 125 135.5 146 156.5 167 177.5 188 198.5 230 240.5 251 261.5 272 282.5 293 303.5
L3 150 162.5 175 187.5 187.5 200 212.5 225 250 262.5 275 287.5 300 312.5 312.5 325
L4 160.5 173 185.5 198 198 210.5 223 235.5 260.5 273 285.5 298 310.5 323 323 335.5
41
56-VQC1000
T Kit (Terminal Block Box Kit)
56-VV5QC11

2xG3/4"
Conduit port 2xC8:3(R)EXH.port
R R
77.7
62.5
3 3
45.5
X X
40.5
B B B B B B B B
12 12
P P
18.7
25
1A A A A A A A A 1
7.7
9.5
(12)
(7.5)
35 2nxC3,C4,C6,M5<4(A),2(B) Port> 20.5

C3:One-touch fitting for Ø 3.2
C4:One-touch fitting for Ø 4 P=10.5 34
2xC8:1(P)SUP.port
M5:M5 Threads
(L4)
(L3) (5.25)
L2
124 L1
7 P=10.5 28
1 21 1.5 1.5 (12) 13
Manual override
Indicator light
D side
U side
A B A B A B A B A B A A B
93.5
126
(35)
66
75
80
(5.5)
(40)
(59)
Power saving unit 4xM4 Mounting holes
2xM5
Mounting holes
Formulas
L1 = 10.5n + 45
L2 = 10.5n + 175.5 (1 power saving unit for 1 to 12 solenoids)
L2 = 10.5n + 196.5 (2 power saving units for 13 to 20 solenoids) n: Stations (Max. 20 single wire stations)
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L1 55.5 66 76.5 87 97.5 108 118.5 129 139.5 150 160.5 171 181.5 192 202.5 213 223.5 234 244.5 255
L2 186 196.5 207 217.5 228 238.5 249 259.5 270 280.5 291 301.5 333 343.5 354 364.5 375 385.5 396 406.5
L3 212.5 225 237.5 237.5 250 262.5 275 287.5 300 300 312.5 325 362.5 375 375 387.5 400 412.5 425 437.5
L4 223 235.5 248 248 260.5 273 285.5 298 310.5 310.5 323 335.5 373 385.5 385.5 398 410.5 423 435.5 448
42
56-VQC2000
56-VV5QC21
2xC10:3(R)EXH.port
76.5
60
49.5
25
18
10
13.5
(12)
(7.5)
2xC10:1(P)SUP.port 25
C10:One-touch fitting for Ø 10 P=16 45
2nxC4,C6,C8<4(A),2(B) Port>
(L4)
(L3)
L2
68 L1
34.5 P=16 38.5 76.5
Indicator light
21 1 1 (12) 13
Manual override
(5.5)
127
105.5
(35)
80
(53.5)
=3.5
=5.5
Power saving unit

4xM5 Mounting holes

AXT100-MC26-015: 1.5 m
AXT100-MC26-030: 3 m
AXT100-MC26-050: 5 m
Formulas
L1 = 16n + 57
L2 = 16n + 131.5 (1 power saving unit for 1 to 12 solenoids)
L2 = 16n + 152.5 (2 power saving units for 13 to 24 solenoids) n: Stations (Max. 24 single wire stations)
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
L1 73 89 105 121 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249 265 281 297 313 329 345 361 377 393 409 425 441
L2 147.5 163.5 179.5 195.5 211.5 227.5 243.5 259.5 275.5 291.5 307.5 323.5 360.5 376.5 392.5 408.5 424.5 440.5 456.5 472.5 488.5 504.5 520.5 536.5
L3 175 187.5 200 225 237.5 250 275 287.5 300 312.5 337.5 350 387.5 400 412.5 437.5 450 462.5 487.5 500 512.5 525 550 562.5
L4 185.5 198 210.5 235.5 248 260.5 285.5 298 310.5 323 348 360.5 398 410.5 423 448 460.5 473 498 510.5 523 535.5 560.5 573
43
56-VQC2000
56-VV5QC21
2xC10:3(R)EXH.port
C1(M12)
C2(M12)

0
76.5
1
60
49.5
30
25
10
13.5
(7.5)
(12)
(L4)
(L3) (5.25)
L2
L1
59.5 34.5 P=16 38.5 76.5
Indicator light
21 21 1 1 (12) 13
Manual override
127
PWR
105.5
COM
(35)
80
(5.5)
(53.5)
EX500
series
=5.5
=3.5
SI unit Power saving unit

4xM5 Mounting holes
Formulas
L1 = 16n + 57
L2 = 16n + 123 (1 power saving unit for 1 to 12 solenoids)
L2 = 16n + 144 (2 power saving units for 13 to 16 solenoids) n: Stations (Max. 16 single wire stations)
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L1 73 89 105 121 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249 265 281 297 313
L2 139 155 171 187 203 219 235 251 267 283 299 315 352 368 384 400
L3 162.5 175 200 212.5 225 250 262.5 275 287.5 312.5 325 337.5 375 387.5 412.5 425
L4 173 185.5 210.5 223 235.5 260.5 273 285.5 298 323 335.5 348 385.5 398 423 435.5
∗ With signal cut block, L4 is obtained by adding approximately 30 mm to L2.
44
56-VQC2000
56-VV5QC21
2xC10:3(R)EXH.port
2xG3/4 C10:One-touch fitting for Ø 10
Conduit port

77.5
49.5
45.5
30
25
10
13.5
(12)
(7.5)
(L4)
(L3) (5.25)
L2
120 L1
7 1 P=16 38.5 76.5
Indicator light 1
(12) 13
Manual override
U side
D side
132.5
105.5
(35)
80
80
(5.5)
(59)
=5.5
Power saving unit

4xM5 Mounting holes
Formulas
L1 = 16n + 45
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
L1 73 89 105 121 137 153 169 185 201 217 233 249 265 281 297 313 329 345 361 377
L2 200 216 232 248 264 280 296 312 328 344 360 376 413 429 445 461 477 493 509 525
L3 225 237.5 262.5 275 287.5 300 325 337.5 350 375 387.5 400 437.5 450 475 487.5 500 512.5 537.5 550
L4 235.5 248 273 285.5 298 310.5 335.5 348 360.5 385.5 398 410.5 448 460.5 485.5 498 510.5 523 548 560.5
45
56-VQC4000
56-VV5QC41
2xRc3/4
3(R)EXH.port
2xRc1/2
1(P)SUP.port
SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC SMC
101
95.5
77.5
60
42.7
43.5
20.5
15.7
18
12
11.5
21.5
21.5 27
(6.5) 2xRc1/8 31
38.7 Pilot EXH.port 38.7
P=25 65.5 (6.5)
2xRc1/8
External pilot port
2n-Rc1/4,3/8,C8,C10,C12<4(A),2(B)Port>
Rc1/4:Rc1/4 Thread
Rc3/8:Rc3/8 Thread
C8 :One-touch fitting for Ø 8
L2
69 L1 (6.5)
Indicator light
21 P=25 65.5
Manual override
A A B A B A B A B A B A
9
A A A A A A A
143
163
74.5
B B
9
B B B
10
Power saving unit

AXT100-MC26-015: 1.5 m
AXT100-MC26-030: 3 m
AXT100-MC26-050: 5 m Formulas
L1 = 25n + 106
L2 = 25n + 181.5 (1 power saving unit for 1 to 12 solenoids)
L2 = 25n + 202.5 (2 power saving units for 13 to 16 solenoids) n: Stations (Max. 16 single wire stations)
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L1 131 156 181 206 231 256 281 306 331 356 381 406 431 456 481 506
L2 206.5 231.5 256.5 281.5 306.5 331.5 356.5 381.5 406.5 431.5 456.5 481.5 527.5 552.5 577.5 602.5
46
56-VQC4000
56-VV5QC41
2xRc3/4
3(R)EXH.port
2xRc1/2
1(P)SUP.port
M12
101
95.5
2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B
0
77.5
60
43.5
42.7
20.5
15.7
12
12
4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A
11.5
21.4
M12 21.5 2xRc1/8 27
(6.5) 38.7 31
Pilot EXH.port 38.7
2xRc1/8 P=25 65.5 (6.5)
External pilot port 2n-Rc1/4,3/8,C8,C10,C12<4(A),2(B)Port>
Rc1/4:Rc1/4 Thread
Rc3/8:Rc3/8 Thread
L2
60.5 L1 6.5
21 21 Indicator light P=25 65.5
Manual override
9
A A A A A A A
PWR
143
163
COM
EX500
series
B B
9
B B B
10
SI unit
Power saving unit

(101)
Formulas
L1 = 25n + 106
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L1 131 156 181 206 231 256 281 306 331 356 381 406 431 456 481 506
L2 198 223 248 273 298 323 348 373 398 423 448 473 519 544 569 594
47
56-VQC4000
56-VV5QC41
2xRc3/4
3(R)EXH.port
2xG3/4" 2xRc1/2
Conduit port 1(P)SUP.port
101
95.5
2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B 2 B
77.5
77.5
45.5
43.5
42.7
20.5
15.7
12
12
4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A
11.5
21.4
21.5 2xRc1/8 27
(6.5) 38.7 31
Pilot EXH.port 38.7
2xRc1/8 P=25 65.5 (6.5)
External pilot port
2n-Rc1/4,3/8,C8,C10,C12<4(A),2(B)Port>
Rc1/4:Rc1/4 Thread
Rc3/8:Rc3/8 Thread
L2
100.5 L1 6.5
7 Indicator light P=25 65.5
Manual override
9
D side
U side
A A A A A A A
143
163
80
B B
34.5
B B B
10
Power saving unit

(101)
Formulas
L1 = 25n + 106
L n 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
L1 131 156 181 206 231 256 281 306 331 356 381 406 431 456 481 506
L2 238 263 288 313 338 363 388 413 438 463 488 513 559 584 609 634
48
ATEX Compliant
For Output
56-EX260 Series
How to Order
56 EX260 S EC1 X42
ATEX category 3 Communication protocol

EC1 EtherCAT
PN1 PROFINET
EN1 EtherNet/IPTM
PR1 PROFIBUS DP
II 3G Ex ec IIC T5 Gc −10°C ≤ Ta ≤ 50°C II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc −10°C ≤ Ta ≤ 50°C

II 3D Ex tc IIIC T58°C Dc IP67 (56-EX260-SEC1-X42) II 3D Ex tc IIIC T69°C Dc IP67 (56-EX260-SEN1-X42)
II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc −10°C ≤ Ta ≤ 50°C II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc −10°C ≤ Ta ≤ 50°C

II 3D Ex tc IIIC T62°C Dc IP67 (56-EX260-SPN1-X42) II 3D Ex tc IIIC T61°C Dc IP67 (56-EX260-SPR1-X42)
Specifications
Model 56-EX260-SEC1-X42 56-EX260-SPN1-X42 56-EX260-SEN1-X42 56-EX260-SPR1-X42
Protocol EtherCAT∗2 PROFINET∗2 EtherNet/IPTM∗2 PROFIBUS DP
Applicable Conformance PROFINET Specification Volume1 (Edition3.17)
Version∗1 DP-VO
system Test Record V.1.1 Version 2.2 Volume2 (Edition1.18)
Configuration file∗3 XML file GSD file EDS file GSD file
I/O occupation area (Inputs/Outputs) 0/32
(9.6/19.2/45.45/93.75/187.5/500 Kbps),
Communication speed 100 Mbps∗2 10 M/100 Mbps∗2
(1.5/3/6/12 Mbps)
Power supply Power supply voltage 21.6 to 26.4 VDC
for control Internal current consumption 100 mA or less
Valve power supply Power supply voltage 22.8 to 26.4 VDC
Communication connector specification M12
Terminating resistor switch None (Not required)
Output type Source/PNP (Negative common)
Number of outputs 32 points
Solenoid valve with surge Solenoid valve with surge
Output Solenoid valve with surge voltage suppressor
Load voltage suppressor voltage suppressor
specifications 24 VDC, 1.5 W or less (SMC)
24 VDC, 1.5 W or less (SMC) 24 VDC, 1.0 W or less (SMC)
Supplied voltage 24 VDC
Supplied current Max. 2.0 A
Enclosure IP67
Operating temperature range –10 to 50°C
Environmental
Operating humidity range 35 to 85%RH (No condensation)
resistance
Withstand voltage 500 VAC for 1 minute between terminals and housing
Insulation resistance 10 MΩ or more (500 VDC measured via megohmmeter) between terminals and housing
Weight 260 g
Accessories 2 pcs.
Accessories Seal cap
EX9-AWTS (1 pc.)
(for M12 connector socket)
∗1 Please note that the version is subject to change.
∗2 Use a CAT5 or higher communication cable.
∗3 Each file can be downloaded from the SMC website, http://www.smc.eu
49
ATEX Compliant
Fieldbus System
Series 56-EX600
How to Order
SI Unit 56-EX600 S PN1 X10

Protocol
Symbol Description
PR1A PROFIBUS DP
PN1 PROFINET
II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc -10°C ≤ Ta ≤ 50°C

(56-EX600-SPR1A-X10)
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T82°C Dc IP67
(56-EX600-SPN1-X10)
Digital Input Unit 56-EX600 DX P D X10

Input type PNP Number of Inputs, Open circuit detection, and Connector
Symbol Number of inputs Open circuit detection Connector
B 8 inputs No M12 connector (5 pins) 4 pcs.
C 8 inputs No M8 connector (3 pins) 8 pcs.
D 16 inputs No M12 connector (5 pins) 8 pcs.

II 3D Ex tc IIIC T82°C Dc IP67 (56-EX600-DXPB-X10)
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T82°C Dc IP67 (56-EX600-DXPC-X10)
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T86°C Dc IP67 (56-EX600-DXPD-X10)
Analog Input Unit 56-EX600 AX A X10

Analog input Number of Input channels and Connector
Symbol Number of input channels Connector
A 2 channels M12 connector (5 pins) 2 pcs.

50
Fieldbus System Series 56-EX600
How to Order
Analog Output Unit 56-EX600 AY A X10

Analog output Number of Output channels and Connector
Symbol Number of output channels Connector
A 2 channels M12 connector (5 pins) 2 pcs.

Analog Input/Output Unit 56-EX600 AM B X10

Analog input/output Number of Input/Output channels and Connector
Symbol Number of input channels Number of output channels Connector
M12 connector (5 pins)
B 2 channels 2 channels
4 pcs.

End Plate 56-EX600 E D 2 2 X10

End plate Mounting method
Symbol Description Note
End plate mounting position: D side Without DIN rail
— mounting bracket
—
Power supply connector
With DIN rail
Symbol Power supply connector Specifications 2 mounting bracket
For SV, S0700, VQC series
2 M12 (5 pins) B-coded IN
3 7/8 inch (5 pins) IN
For M12 For 7/8 inch

II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc -10°C≤ Ta ≤50°C
(56-EX600-ED2-X10)
II 3G Ex ec IIC T4 Gc -10°C≤ Ta ≤50°C
(56-EX600-ED3-X10)
51
Series EX600
Specifications
Digital Input Unit

Model 56-EX600-DXPB-X10 56-EX600-DXPC-X10 56-EX600-DXPD-X10
Input type PNP
Input connector M12 (5-pin) socket∗1 M8 (3-pin) socket∗2 M12 (5-pin) socket∗1
Number of inputs 8 inputs (2 inputs/Connector) 8 inputs (1 input/Connector) 16 inputs (2 inputs/Connector)
0.5 A/Connector 0.25 A/Connector 0.5 A/Connector
Max. supplied current
2 A/Unit 2 A/Unit 2 A/Unit
Input
56-EX600-DXPB-X10 Protection Short-circuit protection

Input current (at 24 VDC) 9 mA or less
17 V or more (At NPN input, between the pin for input terminal and supplied voltage of +24 V)
ON voltage
(At PNP input, between the pin for input terminal and supplied voltage of 0 V)
5 V or less (At NPN input, between the pin for input terminal and supplied voltage of +24 V)
OFF voltage
(At PNP input, between the pin for input terminal and supplied voltage of 0 V)
Current consumption 50 mA or less 55 mA or less 70 mA or less
Enclosure IP67 (Manifold assembly)
Weight 300 g 275 g 340 g
∗1 M12 (4-pin) connector can be connected.
56-EX600-DXPC-X10 ∗2 When connecting the M8 plug connector, the tightening torque must be 0.2 N·m ±10%. If tightened with an
excessive tightening torque, this may cause the connector thread of the unit to break.
Analog Input Unit

Model 56-EX600-AXA-X10
Input type Voltage input Current input
Input connector M12 (5-pin) socket∗1
Input channel 2 channels (1 channel/Connector)
Max. supplied current 0.5 A/Connector
56-EX600-DXPD-X10 Protection Short-circuit protection
Input
Input 12 bit resolution 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

signal range 16 bit resolution –10 to 10 V, –5 to 5 V –20 to 20 mA
Max. rated input signal ±15 V ±22 mA∗2
Input impedance 100 kΩ 50 Ω
Linearity (25°C) ±0.05% F.S.
Repeatability (25°C) ±0.15% F.S.
Absolute accuracy (25°C) ±0.5% F.S. ±0.6% F.S.
Current consumption 70 mA or less
Weight 290 g
56-EX600-AXA-X10 ∗2 When input signal exceeds 22 mA, the protection function activates and the input signal is interrupted.
Analog Output Unit

Model 56-EX600-AYA-X10
Output type Voltage output Current output
Output connector M12 (5-pin) socket∗1
Output channel 2 channels (1 channel/Connector)
Max. load current 0.5 A/Connector
Output
Protection Short-circuit protection

Output
12 bit resolution 0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
56-EX600-AYA-X10 signal range
Load impedance 1 kΩ or more 600 Ω or less
Weight 290 g
52
Fieldbus System Series EX600
Specifications
Analog Input/Output Unit

Model 56-EX600-AMB-X10
Input type Voltage input Current input
Input connector M12 (5-pin) socket∗1
Input channel 2 channels (1 channel/Connector)
Max. supplied current 0.5 A/Connector
Input
Input 12 bit
0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
signal range resolution
56-EX600-AMB-X10 Max. rated input signal 15 V 22 mA∗2
Input impedance 100 kΩ 250 Ω
Output type Voltage output Current output
Output connector M12 (5-pin) socket∗1
Output channel 2 channels (1 channel/Connector)
Max. load current 0.5 A/Connector
Output

Output 12 bit
0 to 10 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 5 V 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
signal range resolution
Load impedance 1 kΩ or more 600 Ω or less
Weight 300 g
∗2 When input signal exceeds 22 mA, the protection function activates and the input signal is interrupted.
End Plate
56-EX600-ED3--X10 Model 56-EX600-ED2--X10 56-EX600-ED3--X10
Power supply PWR IN M12 (5-pin) plug 7/8 inch (5-pin) plug
Power specifications
connector PWR OUT — —

Rated Power supply for control/input 24 VDC ±10%
voltage Power supply for output 24 VDC +10/–5%
Rated Power supply for control/input
Max. 2 A Max. 8 A
current Power supply for output
Weight 170 g 175 g
56-EX600-ED2--X10
53
ATEX Compliant
Air cylinder/ Double acting
Series 55-C76
Ø 32, Ø 40
Note 1) This cylinder can be used in zones 1 and 21 and in zones 2 and 22.
II 2G Ex h IIC T5..T4 Gb If the cylinder is used with SMC category 3 type auto switch, then the
II 2D Ex h IIIC T90°C..T110°C Db cylinder can only be used in zones 2 and 22 and not in zones 1 and 21.
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C76 E 32 50 C XC6A

With magnet 55 CD76 E 32 50 C A XC6A
ATEX category 2 Made to Order
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch Stainless steel piston rod
XC6A and rod-end nut
Stainless steel piston rod,
XC6B
Mounting rod-end nut and mounting nut
E Double end XC22∗ Fluororubber seals
F∗ Front nose XC85 Food grade grease
Y∗ Front nose in line port X2018 Long stroke
∗ Except air cushion type. ∗ Only with rubber cushion type.
Bore size
32 32 mm
40 40 mm Auto switch mounting
A Rail mounting
B Band mounting
Cushion
Mounting Bracket Part No. — Rubber cushion (Standard)
Bore size C Air cushion (only “E” execution)
(mm) 32 40
Mounting bracket
Foot (1 pc.) C76F32A C76F40A
Accessory Mounting bracket
Foot Cylinder stroke

C76F32B C76F40B X2018
(2 pcs. with mounting nut 1 pc.) Bore size
Standard stroke (Long stroke)
Trunnion C76T32 C76T40 (mm)
Clevis C76C32 C76C40 32 10,25,40,50,80,100
301 to 1000
Single knuckle joint KJ10DA KJ12DA 40 125,160,200,250,300
Double knuckle joint GKM10-20A GKM12-24A
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175 Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
Mounting Bracket Part No.

Bore size (mm)
32 40
Mounting bracket
Flange, Foot (1pc.) C76F32A C76F40A
Flange, Foot
(2 pcs. with mounting C76F32B C76F40B
Mounting bracket nut 1 pc.)
Trunnion C76T32 C76T40

Clevis C76C32 C76C40
Single knuckle joint KJ10DA KJ12DA
Accessories Double knuckle joint GKM10-20A GKM12-24A
Floating joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
54
ATEX Compliant Air Cylinder Series 55-C76
Specifications
Bore size Ø 32 Ø 40
Action Double acting
Fluid Air
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature –10 to 60 °C (No freezing)
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube)
Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
Allowable stroke tolerance 0/+1.4

Non rotating accuracy ± 0.5°
Symbol Port size G 1/8 G 1/4
Standard: Double Action Cushion Rubber cushion, Air cushion
Rubber Cushion Rubber Cushion Mounting Double end, Front nose, Front nose in line
Single Rod Double Rod
Note) All other specifications

Air Cushion Air Cushion
Single Rod Double Rod (dimensions, drawings, etc.)
are the same as the non ATEX type.
Simple Specials -XA (Change of rod end shape)

as detailed for the equivalent standard Non-Atex
range of C76 series
Non-rotating rod: Double Acting/Single Rod
55
Air cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Standard: Double Acting, Double Rod
Series 55-C76W
Ø 32, Ø 40
II 2G Ex h IIC T5..T4 Gb
II 2D Ex h IIIC T90°C..T110°C Db
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C76 WE 32 50 C XC6A

With magnet 55 CD76WE 32 50 C A XC6A
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch Stainless steel piston rod and
XC6A
rod-end nut
XC6B
E Double end type XC22∗ Fluororubber seals
XC85 Food grade lubricant
X2018 Long stroke
∗ Only with rubber cushion type.
Bore size
32 32 mm
40 40 mm Auto switch mounting
A Rail mounting
B Band mounting
Cushion
Mounting Bracket Part No. — Rubber cushion (Standard)
Bore size C Air cushion
Mounting (mm) 32 40
bracket
Foot (1 pc.)
Mounting bracket
C76F32A C76F40A
Foot Cylinder stroke
(2 pcs. with mounting nut 1 pc.) C76F32B C76F40B Bore size X2018
Trunnion C76T32 C76T40 (mm)
Clevis C76C32 C76C40 32 10,25,40,50,80,100,125
301 to 500
Single knuckle 40 160,200,250,300
joint KJ10DA KJ12DA
Accessory
Double knuckle Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.

joint GKM10-20A GKM12-24A
Floating
joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
Specifications
Bore size (mm) Ø 32 Ø 40

Action Double Acting, Double Rod
Fluid Air
Ambient and fluid temperature –10 to 60 °C (no freezing)
Piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s
+1.4
Stroke tolerance 0 mm
Cushion Rubber cushion, Air cushion
Port size G1/8 G1/4
Mounting Double end
56
ATEX CompliantAir cylinder
Non-rotating Type: Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-C76K
Ø 32, Ø 40
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C76K E 32 50 XC6A

With magnet 55 CD76K E 32 50 A XC6A
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch Stainless steel piston rod and
XC6A
rod-end nut
XC6B
E Double end X2018 Long stroke
F Front nose
Y Front nose in line port
Auto switch mounting

Bore size A Rail mounting
32 32 mm B Band mounting
40 40 mm
Cylinder stroke
Bore size X2018
(mm)
Mounting Bracket Part No. 32 10,25,40,50,80,100
Bore size 301 to 1000
Mounting 40 125,160,200,250,300
(mm) 32 40
bracket
Mounting bracket
Foot (1 pc.) C76F32A C76F40A

Foot
(2 pcs. with mounting nut 1 pc.) C76F32B C76F40B
Trunnion C76T32 C76T40
Clevis C76C32 C76C40
Single knuckle
KJ10DA KJ12DA
Accessory
joint
Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
Double knuckle
joint GKM10-20A GKM12-24A
Floating
joint JA25-10-150 JA40-12-175
Specifications
Bore size (mm) Ø 32 Ø 40

Action Double Acting, Single Rod
Fluid Air
+1.4
Stroke tolerance 0 mm
Cushion Rubber cushion
Port size G1/8 G1/4
Non-rotating accuracy ±0.5° ±0.5°
Mounting Double end, Front nose, Front nose in line port
57
ATEX Compliant
ISO Cylinder/Double Acting
Series 55-C85
Ø 8, Ø 10, Ø 12, Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25
cylinder can only be used in zones 2 and 22 and not in zones 1 and 21.
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C85 N 16 40 C XC6A

With magnet 55 CD85 N 16 40 C A XC6A
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch Stainless steel piston
XC6A
rod and rod-end nut
Mounting Stainless steel piston rod,
XC6B
N∗ Basic (integrated clevis) rod-end nut and mounting nut
E Double end XC22 Fluororubber seals
F Front nose X2018 Long stroke
∗ Air cushion type is available for N
type only.
Auto switch mounting type

Specifications A Rail mounting
B Band mounting
Please order auto switches and
Bore size (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 bands separately.
Fluid Air
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa Cushion
Min. operating pressure 0.1 MPa 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa — Rubber cushion (Standard)
Ambient and fluid temperature –10 to 60 °C (No freezing) Air cushion
C
(Only “N” execution, bores 10 to 25 mm)
Piston speed Air cushion: 50 to 1000 mm/s, Rubber cushion: 50 to 750 mm/s
+1.0 +1.4
Stroke tolerance 0 mm 0 mm
Cushion Rubber cushion Rubber cushion, Air cushion Bore size Cylinder stroke
Port size M5X0.8 G1/8 Bore size X2018
(mm) Standard stroke (mm)∗∗ (Long stroke)
Mounting Integrated clevis, Double end, Front nose, Front nose in line port
8∗ 101 to 200
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
10 101 to 400
12 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
125, 160, 200 201 to 400
16
20 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
301 to 1000
25 125, 160, 200, 250, 300
∗ Not available with air cushion.
Mounting Bracket Part No. ∗∗ Other strokes available on request.
Bore size
Mounting (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25
bracket
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A
Mounting bracket
Foot
(2 pcs. with mounting nut 1 pc.) C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25 Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
Clevis C85C10 C85C16 C85C25
Single knuckle KJ8D KJ10D
KJ4D KJ6D
joint
Accessory
Double knuckle GKM8 GKM10

GKM4-8 GKM6-10
joint -16 -20
Floating JA20 JA30
joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100
-8-125 -10-125
58
ATEX Compliant
ISO Cylinder [ISO/6432]
Series 55-C85W
Ø 8, Ø 10, Ø 12, Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C85W E 16 40 C XC6A

With magnet 55 CD 85WE 16 40 C B XC6A
— Standard
Stainless steel piston
XC6A
rod and rod-end nut
Built-in magnet for auto switch
XC6B
rod-end nut and mounting nut
XC22 Fluororubber seals
Mounting X2018 Long stroke
E Double end
Specifications
Bore size (mm)

8 10 12 16 20 25
A Rail mounting
B Band mounting
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa bands separately.
Min. operating pressure 0.1 MPa 0.08 MPa 0.05 MPa
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) Cushion
Piston speed Air cushion: 50 to 1000 mm/s, Rubber cushion: 50 to 750 mm/s — Rubber cushion (Standard)
+1.0 +1.4 Air cushion
Stroke tolerance 0 mm 0 mm C
(Only “N” execution, bores 10 to 25 mm)
Cushion Rubber cushion Rubber cushion, Air cushion
Port size M5X0.8 G1/8
Mounting Double end
Bore size Cylinder stroke
Bore size X2018
Mounting Bracket Part No. (mm) Standard stroke (mm)∗∗ (Long stroke)
Bore size 8∗
Mounting (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100 —
bracket 10
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A 12
Mounting bracket
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100

Foot 125, 160, 200 —
C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B 16
(2 pcs. with mounting nut 1 pc.) 20 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25 125, 160, 200, 250, 300 301 to 500
25
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25 ∗ Not available with air cushion.
Clevis C85C10 C85C16 C85C25 ∗∗ Other strokes available on request.
KJ4D KJ6D
joint
Accessory

GKM4-8 GKM6-10
joint -16 -20
Floating Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
JA20 JA30
joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100
-8-125 -10-125
59
ATEX Compliant Air cylinder
Series 55-C85K
Ø 8, Ø 10, Ø 12, Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C85 K N 16 40 XC6A

With magnet 55 CD 85K N 16 40 A XC6A
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch Stainless steel piston rod
XC6A
and rod-end nut
XC6B
rod-end nut and mounting nut
Mounting
X2018 Long stroke
N Basic (integrated clevis)
E Double end
F Front nose

Specifications A Rail mounting
B Band mounting
Bore size (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 bands separately.
Fluid Air
Lubrication Not required (Non-lube) Bore size Cylinder stroke
Piston speed Rubber cushion: 50 to 750 mm/s Bore size X2018
+1.0 +1.4 (mm) Standard stroke (mm)∗ (Long stroke)
Stroke tolerance 0 mm 0 mm
Cushion Rubber cushion 8 101 to 200
10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
Port size M5X0.8 G1/8 10 101 to 400
12 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
Non-rotating accuracy ±1.5° ±1° ±0.7° 201 to 400
16 125, 160, 200
Mounting Integrated clevis, Double end, Front nose, Front nose in line port 20 10, 25, 40, 50, 80, 100
125, 160, 200, 250, 300 301 to 1000
25
∗ Other strokes available on request.

Bore size All other specifications are the same as the
Mounting (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25
bracket standard products Series C85K.
Foot (1 pc.) C85L10A C85L16A C85L25A
Mounting bracket
Foot Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.

(2 pcs. with mounting nut 1 pc.) C85L10B C85L16B C85L25B
Flange C85F10 C85F16 C85F25
Trunnion C85T10 C85T16 C85T25
Clevis C85C10 C85C16 C85C25
KJ4D KJ6D
Accessory
joint
GKM4-8 GKM6-10
joint -16 -20
Floating JA20 JA30
joint JA10-4-070 JA15-6-100
-8-125 -10-125
60
ATEX Compliant
ISO Cylinder/Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-C95
Ø 160, Ø 200, Ø 250
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C95S B 160 100 XC6

With magnet 55 C95SD B 160 100 XC6
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch Change of rod end shape.
XA XA0 to XA30 and XA50
Mounting Stainless steel
B Basic/without bracket XC6 piston rod
L Axial foot Bore size and rod-end nut
F Rod side flange 160 160 mm Change of trunnion
G Head side flange 200 200 mm XC14 bracket mounting
C Single clevis 250 250 mm position (Rod side)
D Double clevis Simple specials part no. except for XC14A or B.
T Centre trunnion
* G, C and D options are not available with double rod Cylinder stroke
Maximum Stroke
Bore size
Specifications (mm) Standard XC6 XC14
160 2000 1600 2000
Bore size (mm) Ø 160 Ø 200 Ø 250 200 2000 1600 2000
250 2400 1500 2400
Please consult with SMC for longer strokes.
Fluid Air
Min. operating pressure 0.05 MPa All other specifications are the same as the
Ambient and fluid temperature standard products Series C95.
–10 to 60 $C (No freezing)
+1.0 +1.4 +1.8
Up to 250: 0 ,
251 to 1000: 0 ,
1001 to 1500: 0
Stroke tolerance +2.2 +2.6
1501 to 2000: 0 , 2001 to 2400: 0
Cushion Both ends (Air cushion)
Port size G 3/4 G 3/4 G1
Basic, Axial foot, Rod side flange, Head side flange,
Mounting Single clevis, Double clevis, Centre trunnion
Mounting Bracket, Mounting Accessories

Description Bore size Ø 160 Ø 200 Ø 250
Symbol Non rotating rod:
Double acting/ Double acting/
L Foot L5160 L5200 L5250
Single rod Single rod
F, G Flange F5160 F5200 F5250
C Single clevis C5160 C5200 C5250
D Double clevis D5160 D5200 D5250
GKM Rod clevis (2) GKM35-54 GKM40-84
Piston rod (3)
KJ KJ36D KJ42D
ball joint
Note 1) Accessories for each mounting bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis: Mounting bolts
Double clevis: Mounting bolts, Clevis pin
Note 2) GKM according to ISO 8140 (Except GKM35-54)
Note 3) KJ according to ISO 8139
61
ATEX Compliant
ISO Cylinder/Double Acting, Double Rod
Series 55-C95W
Ø 160, Ø 200, Ø 250
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C95S B 160 100 W XC14

With magnet 55 C95SD B 160 100 W XC14
ATEX category 2
Made to Order
Built-in magnet for auto switch Standard
—Change of rod end shape
Mounting
Change of rod end shape.
B Basic/without bracket XA
XA0 to XA30 and XA50
L Axial foot Change of trunnion bracket
XC14
F Rod side flange mounting position
T Centre trunnion Simple specials part no. except for XC14A or B.

160 160 mm Maximum Stroke
200 200 mm
Bore size
250 250 mm Standard XC14
(mm)
160 1200 1200
200 1200 1200
Specifications 250 1200 1200
Bore size (mm) Ø 160 Ø 200 Ø 250

Fluid Air
All other specifications are the same as the
standard products Series C95W.
Ambient and fluid temperature –10 to 60 $C (No freezing)
+1.0 +1.4
Up to 250: 0 , 251 to 1000: 0 , 1001 to 1500:
+1.8
0
Symbol Non rotating rod:
Stroke tolerance +2.2 +2.6 Double acting/ Double acting/
1501 to 2000: 0 , 2001 to 2400: 0
Double rod Double rod
Port size G 3/4 G 3/4 G1
Mounting Basic, Axial foot, Rod side flange, Centre trunnion
62
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Standard: Double Acting
Series 55-C96/55-C96W
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
II 2D Ex h IIIC T80°C..T100°C Db For the Ø 125, refer to the next page
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C96S B 32 100 C XC68

With magnet 55 C96SD B 32 100 C XC68
ATEX category 2
Made to Order
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch XA Change of rod end shape
XC4 With heavy duty scraper (Ø 32 to Ø 100)
Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut,
Mounting XC7
etc. made of stainless steel
B Basic/without bracket XC14∗ Change of trunnion bracket mounting position
L Axial foot XC22 Fluororubber seals
F Rod side flange Made of Stainless Steel
XC65
G Head side flange (Combination of XC7 and XC68)
C Single clevis With chrome plated stainless steel
XC68
D Double clevis piston rod and stainless steel nut
T Centre trunnion XC85 Grease for food processing equipment
∗ Mounting options for W type: ∗ Simple specials part no. except for XC14A or B.
B, L, F, T, G
Rod
Bore size
– Single rod
32 32 mm
W Double rod
40 40 mm
50 50 mm
63 63 mm
80 80 mm
100 100 mm
Cylinder stroke (mm)

Bore size Standard max. Double Rod XC68 All other specifications (dimensions, drawings, etc)
Standard stroke (mm)
(mm) stroke Note) Max. stroke Max. stroke are the same as the non ATEX type.
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
32 1000 1000
250, 320, 400, 500 Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
40 1900 1700
250, 320, 400, 500
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
50 250, 320, 400, 500, 600 1900 1700
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200 1000
63 250, 320, 400, 500, 600 1900 1700
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
80 1900 1700
250, 320, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
100 1900 1700
250, 320, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800
Intermediate strokes are available.
∗ Please consult with SMC for longer strokes.
63
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Standard: Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-C96
Ø 125
II 2G h IIC T5..T4 Gb For the Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50,
Ø 63, Ø 80, and Ø 100,
II 2D h IIIC T86°C..T106°C Db refer to page 63.
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C96S B 125 100 XC68

With magnet 55 C96SD B 125 100 XC68
— Standard
XA Change of rod end shape
Built-in magnet for auto switch Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut,
XC7
XC14∗ Change of trunnion bracket mounting position
XC18 NPT ports
Mounting XC22 Fluororubber seals
B Basic/without bracket With chrome plated stainless steel
L Axial foot XC68 piston rod and stainless steel nut
F Rod side flange ∗ Simple specials part no. except for XC14A or B.
G Head side flange
C Single clevis
D Double clevis
T Centre trunnion Cylinder stroke (mm)
Bore size Standard max. XC68
(mm) stroke∗ Max. stroke
Bore size 125∗∗ 2000 1600
125 125 mm
∗∗ Ø 125 are produced upon receipt of order.
All other specifications (dimensions, drawings, etc)

64
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-C96W
Ø 125
II 2D h IIIC T86°C..T106°C Db Ø 63, Ø 80, and Ø 100,
refer to page 63.
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C96S B 125 100 W XC68

With magnet 55 C96SD B 125 100 W XC68
— Standard
XA Change of rod end shape
Built-in magnet for auto switch Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut,
XC7
XC14∗ Change of trunnion bracket mounting position
Mounting XC18 NPT ports
B Basic/without bracket XC22 Fluororubber seals
L Axial foot With chrome plated stainless steel
XC68
F Rod side flange piston rod and stainless steel nut
T Centre trunnion ∗ Simple specials part no. except for XC14A or B.
Bore size Rod

125 125 mm W Double rod

Bore size (mm) Max. stroke∗
125∗∗ 1000
All other specifications (dimensions, drawings, etc)

65
Series C96/C96W
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

Fluid Air
Ambient and fluid Without auto switch: –20 to 70 °C ∗
temperature With auto switch: –10 to 60 °C ∗
Operating piston speed 50 to 1000 mm/s 50 to 700 mm/s
+1.0 +1.4
Allowable stroke tolerance Up to 250 st: 0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0 , 1001 to 1500 st: +1.8
0 , 1501 to 2000 st: +2.2
0

Port size G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2
Basic, Axial foot, Rod end flange,

Mounting Head end flange, Single clevis, Double clevis,
Centre trunnion
∗ No freezing
66
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Non-rotating type: Double Acting
Series 55-C96K/55-C96KW
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C96K B 32 100 C XC7

With magnet 55 C96KD B 32 100 C XC7
Made to Order
ATEX category 2
— Standard
XC7
made of stainless steel
Rod
Mounting – Simple rod
B Basic/without bracket W Double rod
L Axial foot
F Rod side flange Cylinder stroke (mm)
G Head side flange Bore size
Maximum stroke (mm)
C Single clevis (mm)
D Double clevis 32 500
T Centre trunnion 40 500
Mounting options for W type: 50 600
B, L, F, T, G 63 600
80 800
100 800
Bore size
32 32 mm
40 40 mm All other specifications are the same
as the standard products Series C96.
50 50 mm
For details, refer to the WEB catalog.
63 63 mm
80 80 mm
100 100 mm Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
67
Series C96K/C96KW
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100

Fluid Air
Allowable stroke tolerance Up to 250 st: +1.0 +1.4
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0

Port size G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2

Centre trunnion
Non-rotating accuracy ±0.5° ±0.5° ±0.3°

Allowable rotating torque
0.25 0.45 0.64 0.79
Nm max.
∗ No freezing
68
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Smooth Cylinder/Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-C96Y
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C96Y B 32 100 C

With magnet 55 C96YD B 32 100 C
ATEX category 2 Cylinder stroke (mm)
Bore size
Maximum stroke (mm)
(mm)
32 800
40 800
Mounting 1000
50
B Basic/without bracket 63 1000
L Axial foot 80 1000
F Rod side flange 100 1000
G Head side flange
C Single clevis
D Double clevis
T Centre trunnion All other specifications (dimensions, drawings, etc)
Bore size
40 40 mm
50 50 mm
63 63 mm
80 80 mm
100 100 mm
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

Fluid Air
Min. operating pressure 0.02 MPa 0.01 MPa
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0
Cushion Non
Centre trunnion
Allowable air leak 0.5 l/min (ANR)
∗ No freezing
69
ATEX Compliant
Smooth Cylinder: Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-C96Y
Ø 125
II 2G h IIC T5..T4 Gb
II 2D h IIIC T86°C..T106°C Db
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C96Y B 125 100

With magnet 55 C96YD B 125 100
ATEX category 2 Cylinder stroke (mm)
Bore size
Maximum stroke (mm)
(mm)
Built-in magnet for auto switch 125 1000
Mounting
B Basic/without bracket
L Axial foot
F Rod side flange
G Head side flange
C Single clevis
D Double clevis
T Centre trunnion
Bore size
125 125 mm
All other specifications are the same as the

standard products Series C96.
70
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-CP96
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
For the Ø 125, refer to the next page
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CP96S B 32 100 C XC68

With magnet 55 CP96SD B 32 100 C XC68
ATEX category 2
Mounting Made to Order

B Basic/without bracket — Standard
L Axial foot XA Change of rod end shape
F Rod side flange XC4 With heavy duty scraper (Ø 32 to Ø 100)
G Head side flange Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut,
XC7
C Single clevis etc. made of stainless steel
D Double clevis XC22 Fluororubber seals
Made of Stainless Steel
XC65
(Combination of XC7 and XC68)
Bore size With chrome plated stainless steel
XC68
32 32 mm piston rod and stainless steel nut
40 40 mm XC85 Grease for food processing equipment
50 50 mm
63 63 mm
80 80 mm
100 100 mm

Bore size XC68
Standard stroke (mm) Max. stroke∗
(mm) Max. stroke
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
32 250, 320, 400, 500 2000 1800
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
40 250, 320, 400, 500 2000 1700
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
50 250, 320, 400, 500, 600 2000 1700
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
63 250, 320, 400, 500, 600 2000 1700 All other specifications are the same as
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200 the standard products Series CP96.
80 250, 320, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 2000 1700 For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
100 250, 320, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 2000 1700 Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
71
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-CP96
Ø 125

II 2D h IIIC T86°C..T106°C Db Ø 63, Ø 80, and Ø 100,
refer to page 71.
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CP96S B 125 100 XC68

With magnet 55 CP96SD B 125 100 XC68
ATEX category 2

Made to Order
— Standard
Mounting XA Change of rod end shape
B Basic/without bracket Tie-rod, cushion valve, tie-rod nut,
XC7
L Axial foot etc. made of stainless steel
F Rod side flange XC18 NPT ports
G Head side flange XC22 Fluororubber seals
C Single clevis With chrome plated stainless steel
XC68
D Double clevis piston rod and stainless steel nut
Bore size
125 125 mm

Bore size XC68
Max. stroke∗ All other specifications are the same as
(mm) Max. stroke the standard products Series CP96.
125∗∗ 2000 1600 For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
∗ Please consult with SMC for longer strokes. Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
72
ISO Cylinder: Standard
Double Acting, Single Rod Series CP96
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

Fluid Air
+1.0 +1.4
0 , 1501 to 2000 st: +2.2
0


Centre trunnion
∗ No freezing
73
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-CP96W
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
For the Ø 125, refer to the next page
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CP96S B 32 100 C W XC68

With magnet 55 CP96SD B 32 100 C W XC68
ATEX category 2
Made to Order
— Standard
XC4 With heavy duty scraper (Ø 32 to Ø 100)
XC7
B Basic/without bracket Made of Stainless Steel
XC65
L Axial foot (Combination of XC7 and XC68)
F Rod side flange With chrome plated stainless steel
XC68
G Head side flange piston rod and stainless steel nut
XC85 Grease for food processing equipment
Rod
Bore size W Double rod
32 32 mm
40 40 mm
50 50 mm
63 63 mm
80 80 mm Bore size Max. stroke for standard
100 100 mm (mm) type and XC68∗
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
32 250, 320, 400, 500 1000
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
40 250, 320, 400, 500 1000
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
50 250, 320, 400, 500, 600 1000
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
63 250, 320, 400, 500, 600 1000
25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
All other specifications are the same as 80 250, 320, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000
the standard products Series CP96W.
For details, refer to the WEB catalogue. 25, 50, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200
100 250, 320, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000

74
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-CP96W
Ø 125
For the Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50,
Ø 63, Ø 80, and Ø 100,
II 2D h IIIC T86$C..T106$C Db
refer to page 74.
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CP96S B 125 100 W XC68

With magnet 55 CP96SD B 125 100 W XC68
— Standard
XC7
XC18 NPT ports
B Basic/without bracket With chrome plated stainless steel
L Axial foot XC68
piston rod and stainless steel nut
F Rod side flange
Rod
W Double rod
Bore size
125 125 mm
Bore size (mm) Max. stroke
125 1000
Ø 125 are produced upon receipt of order.
All other specifications are the same as

75
Series CP96W
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100 125

Fluid Air
+1.0 +1.4
0 , 1501 to 2000 st: +2.2
0


Centre trunnion
∗ No freezing
76
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-CP96K
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CP96K B 32 100 C XC7

With magnet 55 CP96KD B 32 100 C XC7
— Standard
XC7
Built-in magnet for auto switch made of stainless steel

Mounting Bore size Maximum stroke
B Basic/without bracket (mm) (mm)
L Axial foot 32 500
F Rod side flange 40 500
G Head side flange 50 600
C Single clevis 63 600
D Double clevis 80 800
100 800
Bore size
32 32 mm All other specifications are the same as
40 40 mm the standard products Series CP96.
50 50 mm For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
63 63 mm
100 100 mm
77
Series CP96K
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100

Fluid Air
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0

Port size G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2

Centre trunnion

0.25 0.45 0.64 0.79
Nm max.
∗ No freezing
78
ISO Cylinder
ATEX Compliant
Non-rotating Type: Double Acting, Double Rod
Series 55-CP96KW
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CP96K B 32 100 C W XC7

With magnet 55 CP96KD B 32 100 C W XC7
— Standard
Built-in magnet for auto switch XC7
Rod
Mounting
W Double rod
B Basic/without bracket
L Axial foot Cylinder stroke (mm)
F Rod side flange Bore size Maximum stroke
G Head side flange (mm) (mm)
32 500
Bore size 40 500
32 32 mm 50 600
40 40 mm 63 600
50 50 mm 80 800
63 63 mm 100 800
80 80 mm

Specifications
Bore size (mm) 32 40 50 63 80 100

Fluid Air
0 , 251 to 1000 st: 0

Port size G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2

Centre trunnion

0.25 0.45 0.64 0.79
Nm max.
∗ No freezing
79
ATEX Compliant
ISO Standards/Compact Cylinder
Series 55-C55
Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 C55 B 20 10

With magnet 55 CD55 B 20 10
ATEX category 2

Body option
— Standard (Rod end female thread)
Mounting M Rod end male thread
B Through-hole/Both ends tapped common (Standard)
L Foot
F Rod side flange
G Head side flange Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm)
C Single clevis 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 80
20 to 63 100, 125, 150
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 80
80, 100 100, 125
Bore size
20 20 mm
25 25 mm
40 40 mm the standard products Series C55.
50 50 mm For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
63 63 mm
100 100 mm
80
Series 55-C55
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

Type Pneumatic (Non-lube)
Action Double acting, Single rod
Fluid Air
Maximum operating pressure 1.0 MPa
Minimum operating pressure 0.05 MPa 0.03 MPa

Symbol Cushion Rubber bumper on both end
Double Acting/Single Rod
Stroke length tolerance +1.0 mm
0
Mounting Through-hole/Both ends tapped common
Piston speed 50 to 500 mm/s 50 to 300 mm/s
Standard Stroke
Bore size (mm) Standard stroke (mm) Intermediate strokes

20 to 63 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 80, 100, 125, 150 6 ~149
80 to 100 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 80, 100, 125 6 ~124
Bore size Single

Foot Flange
(mm) clevis
20 C55-L020 C55-F020 C55-C020
25 C55-L025 C55-F025 C55-C025
32 C55-L032 C55-F032 C55-C032
40 C55-L040 C55-F040 C55-C040
50 C55-L050 C55-F050 C55-C050
63 C55-L063 C55-F063 C55-C063
80 C55-L080 C55-F080 C55-C080
100 C55-L100 C55-F100 C55-C100
• Order two foot brackets per cylinder.

• Parts belonging to each bracket are as follows.
Foot, Flange, Single clevis/Body mounting bolt

(dimensions, drawings, etc.)
81
ATEX Compliant
Air Cylinder/Double acting, Single rod
Series 55-JCM
Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40
How to Order
Without auto switch 55 JCM BZ 20 100

With auto switch 55 JCDM BZ 20 100
ATEX category 2
With auto switch

(Built-in magnet) Mounting nut
— None
D With mounting nut (1 pc.)∗1
Mounting ∗1 For M and MZ only.
Basic (Female thread on Bore size Mounting nut is shipped together with
the product, but not assembled.
rod cover) 20 20 mm
BZ 25 25 mm
Mounting nut
32 32 mm
40 40 mm
Basic (Female thread on
both covers) Port thread type
B — M5
TR Rc1/8 Rod end nut is
TN NPT1/8 provided as standard.
Male thread on both

covers
M
Refer to “Standard Strokes” on
the table below.
Male thread on rod cover

Rod end thread
MZ — Male thread
F Female thread
Standard Strokes
Bore size
Standard stroke (mm) Note)
(mm)
20
25
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300
32
40
Note) Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon receipt of order.
The minimum stroke is 25 mm.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series JCM.
82
ATEX Compliant
Air Cylinder/Standard type: Double acting, Single rod
Series 55-CG1
Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CG1 L N 25 100 Z XC85

With magnet 55 CDG1 L N 25 100 Z XC85
ATEX category 2
Made to Order
— Standard
XC6 Made of stainless steel
XC10 Dual stroke cylinder/Double rod
Mounting
XC11 Dual stroke cylinder/Single rod
B Basic Cushion Larger throttle diameter
L Axial foot N Rubber cushion XC37 of connection port
F Rod side flange A Air cushion XC85 Grease for food processing equipment
G Head side flange
Note 1) “How to Order” for XC10, and XC11
U∗ Rod side trunnion are different from the above.
T∗ Head side trunnion Bore size Refer to the catalogue on
D Clevis 20 20 mm 50 50 mm www.smc.eu
25 25 mm 63 63 mm Note 2) XC10 and XC11 are not applicable
∗ Not available for Ø 80 or Ø 100.
to XC85.
Note) Mounting brackets are shipped 32 32 mm 80 80 mm
together, (but not assembled). 40 40 mm 100 100 mm Rod end thread
— Male rod end
Port thread type F Female rod end
Rubber cushion Air cushion
— Rc Ø 20 to Ø 100 M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
—
TN NPT Ø 20 to Ø 100 Rc Ø 32 to Ø 100
M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25 M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
TF TN
G Ø 32 to Ø 100 NPT Ø 32 to Ø 100
M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
TF
G Ø 32 to Ø 100

Bore size Standard stroke Note 1) Max. manufacturable stroke Note 2)
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
25
32
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 1500
50
250, 300
63
80
100
Note 1) Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon receipt of order.
The manufacturing of intermediate strokes in 1 mm increments is possible. (Spacers
are not used.)
Note 2) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage. For details, refer to the
“Air Cylinders Model Selection” on www.smc.eu
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series CG1.
83
Series 55-CG1
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

Action Double acting/Single rod
Lubrication Non-lube
Fluid Air
Ambient and fluid temperature –10 to +60 °C (No freezing)
+1.4 +1.8 Up to 1000 +1.4

0 mm
Stroke tolerance Up to 1000 0 mm, Up to 1200 0 mm +1.8
Up to 1500 0 mm
Note) All other specifications Cushion Rubber bumper/Air cushion

Basic, Axial foot, Front flange, Rear flange, Front trunnion,
are the same as the non ATEX type. Mounting∗ Rear trunnion, Clevis
(Used for changing the port location by 90 degrees.)
∗ Front/Rear trunnion styles are not available for bore sizes Ø 80 and Ø 100.
Symbol
Double Acting/Single Rod
Accessories
Axial Front Rear Front Rear

Mounting Basic Clevis
foot flange flange trunnion trunnion
Rubber Bumper Air Cushion Rod end nut

Standard
Clevis pin — — — — — —
Double Acting/Double Rod Single knuckle joint
Double knuckle
joint ∗∗
Option (With pins)
Pivot bracket — — — — ∗ ∗
Rod boot
Rubber Bumper Air Cushion
∗ Pivot bracket is not available for bore sizes Ø 80 and Ø 100.
∗∗ Pins and snap rings for double knuckle joint are included, not mounted.
Bore size (mm)

Mounting bracket
20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
Axial foot∗ CG-L020 CG-L025 CG-L032 CG-L040 CG-L050 CG-L063 CG-L080 CG-L100
Flange CG-F020 CG-F025 CG-F032 CG-F040 CG-F050 CG-F063 CG-F080 CG-F100
Trunnion CG-T020 CG-T025 CG-T032 CG-T040 CG-T050 CG-T063 — —
Clevis∗∗ CG-D020 CG-D025 CG-D032 CG-D040 CG-D050 CG-D063 CG-D080 CG-D100
Pivot bracket CG-020-24A CG-025-24A CG-032-24A CG-040-24A CG-050-24A CG-063-24A CG-080-24A CG-100-24A
∗ Order two foot brackets per cylinder.
∗∗ Clevis pins, snap rings and mounting bolts are attached for the clevis.
∗∗∗ Mounting bolts are attached for the foot type and the flange type.
84
ATEX Compliant
Air Cylinder/Standard type: Double acting, Double rod
Series 55-CG1W
Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CG1 W L N 25 100 Z XC85

With magnet 55 CDG1W L N 25 100 Z XC85
ATEX category 2
Made to Order
Built-in magnet for auto switch — Standard
XC85 Food grade grease
Double Acting/Double Rod

Rod end thread
— Male rod end
Mounting F Female rod end
B Basic
L Axial foot Cushion
F Flange N Rubber cushion
U∗ Centre trunnion A Air cushion
∗ Not available for bore size Ø 80
and Ø 100.
Note) Mounting brackets are shipped Bore size
together, (but not assembled). 20 20 mm 50 50 mm
25 25 mm 63 63 mm
32 32 mm 80 80 mm
40 40 mm 100 100 mm
Port thread type

Rubber cushion Air cushion
— Rc Ø 20 to Ø 100 M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
—
TN NPT Ø 20 to Ø 100 Rc Ø 32 to Ø 100
M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25 M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
TF TN
G Ø 32 to Ø 100 NPT Ø 32 to Ø 100
M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
TF
G Ø 32 to Ø 100

Bore size Standard stroke Note 1) Max. manufacturable stroke Note 2)
20 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200
25
32
40
25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 200 1500
50
250, 300
63
80
100
Note 1) Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon receipt of order.
The manufacturing of intermediate strokes in 1 mm increments is possible. (Spacers are
not used.)
Note 2) Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the usage. For details, refer to the “Air
Cylinders Model Selection” on front matter pages of the Best Pneumatics No. 2 or the Web
Catalogue.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series CG1W.
85
ATEX Compliant
Stainless Steel Cylinder/Standard Type: Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-CG5-S
Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Stainless steel cylinder
55 CG5 L N 25 S R 100
With magnet 55 CDG5 L N 25 S R 100
ATEX category 2
Built-in magnet for auto switch Standard stroke [mm]

Maximum
Bore size Standard stroke∗1
manufacturable stroke∗2
Mounting type
25, 50, 75, 100,
B Basic type 20
125, 150, 200
L Axial foot type
25
F Rod side flange type
32
G Head side flange type
40 25, 50, 75, 100, 1500
E Clevis integrated type
50 125, 150, 200,
63 250, 300
Type 80
N Rubber bumper 100
A Air cushion ∗1 Intermediate strokes not listed above are produced upon
receipt of order. The manufacturing of intermediate strokes
in 1 mm increments is possible. (Spacers are not used.)
Bore size ∗2 Applicable strokes should be confirmed according to the
20 20 mm 50 50 mm usage. For details, refer to the “Air Cylinders Model
25 25 mm 63 63 mm Selection”.
32 32 mm 80 80 mm
40 40 mm 100 100 mm Seal material
R NBR
Port thread type V FKM
Rubber bumper Air cushion
M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
— Rc Ø 20 to Ø 100 —
Rc Ø 32 to Ø 100
M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25
TN NPT Ø 20 to Ø 100 TN
NPT Ø 32 to Ø 100
M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25 M5 x 0.8 Ø 20, Ø 25 All other specifications are the same as the standard
TF TF products Series CG5. For details refer to the WEB catalogue.
G Ø 32 to Ø 100 G Ø 32 to Ø 100
86
ATEX Compliant
Air Cylinder/Standard type: Non-lube
Series 55-CS1
Non-lube: Ø 125, Ø 140, Ø 160, Ø 180, Ø 200, Ø 250, Ø 300
II 2G Ex h IIB T5..T4 Gb If the cylinder is used with SMC category 3 type auto switch, then the
How to Order
55 CS1 L N 160 300

ATEX category 2
Mounting Cushion
B Basic N Without cushion
Cushion
L Foot R With cushion in rod side
F Rod side flange H With cushion in head side
G Head side flange — With cushion in both sides
C Single clevis ∗ If specifying more than one symbol, indicate
D Double clevis them alphabetically.
T Centre trunnion
Tubing material
Bore size Stroke range
Symbol Tubing material
(mm) (mm)
125, 140 1000 or less Bore size
Aluminum Non-lube type
160 1200 or less
— 125, 140 1001 or more 125 125 mm
160 Steel 1201 or more 140 140 mm
180 to 300 All strokes 160 160 mm
125, 140 1000 or less 180 180 mm
F Steel 200 200 mm
160 1200 or less
250 250 mm
300 300 mm
Type
N Non-lube type
Cylinder stroke (mm) Class 2 Pressure Vessel

Tubing material Aluminum Steel The cylinder with a stroke exceeding
the level shown below that is applicable
Mounting Basic, to the Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act
bracket Basic, Head side flange, Head side flange, cannot be installed or used in Japan.
Single clevis, Double clevis, Single clevis, Foot
Centre trunnion, Foot, Rod side flange Bore size Cylinder stroke
Bore Double clevis, (mm) (mm)
Rod side flange Centre trunnion
size
200 998
125 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less
250 813
300 564
180 — 1200 or less 2000 or less
200 — 1200 or less 2000 or less
250 — 1200 or less 2400 or less
300 — 1200 or less 2400 or less
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series CS1.
For details, refer to the WEB catalogue
87
Series 55-CS1
Specifications
Style Non-lube
Fluid Air (Non-lube)
Proof pressure 1) 1.57 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1) 0.97 MPa
Cushion None, air cushion
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 60 °C (No freezing)
250 or less: +1.0 , 251 to 1,000: +1.4, 1,001 to 1,500: +1.8
Stroke length tolerance (mm) 0 0 0
1501 to 2000: +2.2
0
Mounting Basic, Foot, Front flange, Rear flange,

Single clevis, Double clevis, Centre trunnion
Note) All other specifications Note 1) For the CDS1 diameter 180 and 200 the Proof pressure is 1.2 MPa
and the Max. operating pressure is 0.7 MPa.
Accessories
Symbol
Double Acting/Single Rod Front Rear Single Double Centre
Mounting Basic Foot flange flange clevis clevis trunnion
Clevis pin,
Standard — — — — — —
Cotter pin
Rod end nut
Air Cushion Single
knuckle joint
Accessory
Double Acting/Double Rod Double
knuckle joint
(Knuckle pin,
Cotter pin)
Air Cushion
(mm)
Max. Stroke Without magnet With magnet
Tube material Aluminium alloy Carbon steel tube Aluminium alloy
Mounting Basic
bracket Rear flange Basic
Single clevis Rear flange Foot
Double clevis Single clevis B, G, C, D, T L, F ∗
Front flange
Centre trunnion Double clevis
Foot
Bore Front flange
125 1000 or less 1000 or less 1600 or less 1000 or less 1400 or less
180 — 1200 or less 2000 or less 1200 or less 1500 or less
200 — 1200 or less 2000 or less 998 or less 998 or less
250 — 1200 or less 2400 or less - -
300 — 1200 or less 2400 or less - -
∗ For double Rod Type (W), max. stroke for L and F options is the same as B and T options.
88
ATEX Compliant
Air Cylinder
Series 55-CDS1
Ø 125, Ø 140, Ø 160, Ø 180, Ø 200
How to Order
With magnet 55 CDS1 L N 160 300

ATEX category 2
Built-in magnet for auto switch Cushion

N Without cushion
R With cushion in rod side
Mounting Cushion
H With cushion in head side
B Basic — With cushion in both sides
L Foot Type ∗ If specifying more than one symbol, indicate them alphabetically.
F Rod side flange N Non-lube type
G Head side flange
C Single clevis
D Double clevis
T Centre trunnion
Bore size
Non-lube type
125 125 mm
140 140 mm
160 160 mm
180 180 mm
200 200 mm

The cylinder with a stroke exceeding
Maximum Stroke
the level shown below that is applicable
Bore size to the Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act
(mm) Basic, Head side flange, Single clevis, Foot,
Double clevis, Centre trunnion Rod side flange cannot be installed or used in Japan.
125, 140 1000 or less 1400 or less
(mm) (mm)
160 1200 or less 1400 or less
200 998
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series CS1.
89
ATEX Compliant
Air Cylinder: Double Rod Type
Series 55-CS1W
Non-lube type: Ø 125, Ø 140, Ø 160, Ø 180, Ø 200, Ø 250, Ø 300
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CS1 W L N 125 100

With magnet 55 CDS1W L N 125 100
ATEX category 2 Cushion
N Without cushion
Cushion
R With cushion in rod side
Built-in magnet for auto switch H With cushion in head side
— With cushion in both sides
∗ If specifying more than one symbol, indicate
Double rod them alphabetically.
Mounting
B Basic
L Foot
Bore size
F Rod side flange
Non-lube type
T Centre trunnion
125 125 mm
140 140 mm
160 160 mm
Tubing material
180 180 mm
Symbol Bore size Tubing material 200 200 mm
250∗ 250 mm
(mm)
125, 140 300∗ 300 mm
Aluminum
160 ∗ It is not available
— 180 with auto switch.
200 Steel
250, 300 Type
125, 140 N Non-lube type
F Steel
160

The cylinder with a stroke exceeding
Aluminum Steel
Tubing material the level shown below that is applicable
Without magnet With magnet Without magnet to the Class 2 Pressure Vessel Act
Mounting cannot be installed or used in Japan.
Bore Basic, Foot, Rod side flange, Centre trunnion
bracket Bore size Cylinder stroke
size (mm)
(mm) (mm)
125, 140 1000 or less 1000 or less 1000 or less
200 998
250 813
180 — 1200 or less 1200 or less
300 564
200 — 998 or less 1200 or less
250, 300 — — 1200 or less
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series CS1W.
90
ATEX Compliant
Compact Cylinder/Standard: Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-CQ2
Ø 12, Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
If the cylinder is used with SMC category 3 type auto switch, then the
How to Order
Without magnet
Ø 12 to Ø 25 55 CQ2 B 20 30 D
Without magnet
Ø 32 to Ø 100 55 CQ2 B 32 30 D Z
With magnet 55 CDQ2 B 32 30 D Z
Made to Order
ATEX category 2
– Standard
With magnet XC85 With food grade grease
(Built-in magnet)
Mounting bracket Auto switch mounting groove

B Through-hole (Standard) Ø 12 to Ø 25 2 surfaces
Z
A Both ends tapped Ø 32 to Ø 100 4 surfaces
L Foot
F Rod side flange Body option
G Head side flange
– Standard (Rod end female thread)
D Double clevis
C With rubber bumper
∗ Mounting brackets are shipped
M Rod end male thread
together, (but not assembled).
∗ Cylinder mounting bolts are not ∗ Combination of body options (CM) is available.
included.
Bore size Action

12 12 mm D Double acting
16 16 mm
20 20 mm
25 25 mm
32 32 mm
Bore size Standard stroke
40 40 mm
12, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
50 50 mm
20, 25 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50
63 63 mm
32, 40 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100
80 80 mm
50 to 100 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100
100 100 mm
Note) For intermediate strokes, refer to the standard products Series CQ2.
Port thread type

M thread Ø 12 to Ø 25
– All other specifications are the same as
Rc
Ø 32 to Ø 100 the standard products Series CQ2.
TF G
∗ For cylinders without magnet, M threads are
compatible only with Ø 32-5 mm stroke.
91
ATEX Compliant
Compact Cylinder/Standard: Double Acting, Double Rod
Series 55-CQ2W
Ø 12, Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet
Ø 12 to Ø 25 55 CQ2W B 20 30 D
Without magnet
Ø 32 to Ø 100 55 CQ2W B 32 30 D Z
With magnet 55 CDQ2W B 32 30 D Z
Made to Order
ATEX category 2
– Standard
XC85 With food grade grease
With magnet
(Built-in magnet)
Auto switch mounting groove
Mounting bracket Ø 12 to Ø 25 2 surfaces
Z
B Through-hole (Standard) Ø 32 to Ø 100 4 surfaces
A Both ends tapped
L Foot Body option
F Flange – Standard (Rod end female thread)
∗ Mounting brackets are shipped C With rubber bumper
∗ Cylinder mounting bolts are not M Rod end male thread
included. ∗ Combination of body options (CM) is available.
Bore size
12 12 mm Action
20 20 mm
25 25 mm
32 32 mm Cylinder stroke (mm)
40 40 mm Bore size Standard stroke
50 50 mm 12, 16 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
63 63 mm 20, 25 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50
80 80 mm 32, 40 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100
100 100 mm 50 to 100 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 75, 100
Port thread type

–
Rc All other specifications are the same as
Ø 32 to Ø 100
TF G the standard products Series CQ2.
∗ For cylinders without magnet, M threads are For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
compatible only with Ø 32-5 mm stroke.
92
ATEX Compliant
Compact Cylinder/Long stroke: Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-CQ2
Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CQ2 A 32 200 DC Z

With magnet 55 CDQ2 A 32 200 DC Z
Made to Order
ATEX category 2 – Standard
Mounting bracket Z 4 surfaces
A Both ends tapped
L Foot
F Rod side flange Body option
G Head side flange – Standard (Rod end female thread)
D Double clevis M Rod end male thread
∗ Mounting brackets are shipped
Cushion
Bore size C Rubber cushion
32 32 mm
40 40 mm Action
63 63 mm
80 80 mm
100 100 mm Cylinder stroke (mm)
Port thread type 32, 40, 50
125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300
– Rc 63, 80, 100
TF G

the standard products Series CQ2.
93
ATEX Compliant
Compact Cylinder/Large Bore Size: Double Acting, Single Rod
Series 55-CQ2
Ø 125, Ø 140, Ø 160, Ø 180, Ø 200
II 2G Ex h IIC T5..T4 Gb Note 1) This cylinder can be used in zones 1 and 21 and in zones 2 and 22.
How to Order
Without magnet 55 CQ2B 125 30 DC Z

With magnet 55 CDQ2B 125 30 DC Z
Made to Order
ATEX category 2
– Standard

Mounting bracket
Z 4 surfaces
B Standard (Through-hole/Both ends tapped common)
∗ Cylinder mounting bolts are not included.
Body option
– Standard (Rod end female thread)
Bore size
M Rod end male thread
125 125 mm
140 140 mm
160 160 mm Cushion
180 180 mm C Rubber cushion
200 200 mm
Action
D Double acting
Port thread type
– Rc
TF G Cylinder stroke (mm)
125, 140, 160 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100
180, 200 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300

the standard products Series CQ2.
94
Series 55-CQ2
Style
Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200

Through-hole (Standard)
Mounting
Both ends tapped
Built-in magnet
Pneumatic
(1)
M5
Piping Screw-in style M5 M5 M5 M5 G 1/8
G 1/8 G 1/4 G 1/4 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 3/8 G 1/2 G 1/2
Rod end male thread

(2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
With rubber bumper
Note 1) Among those without an auto switch, only the 5mm stroke uses M5 piping.
Note 2) Rubber bumper is standard for bore sizes over Ø 125.
JIS Symbol
Double Acting: Single Rod
Double Acting: Double Rod
Specifications
Bore size (mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 125 140 160 180 200

Style Pneumatic (Non-lube)
Fluid Air
Proof pressure 1.5 MPa 1.05 MPa
Max. operating pressure 1.0 MPa 0.7 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature With auto switch: –10 °C to 60 °C (No freezing) / Without auto switch: –10 °C to 70 °C (No freezing)
Cushion None, rubber bumper Rubber bumper

Rod end thread Male thread, Female thread
Tolerance of stroke length (mm) +1.0 +1.4
0 0
Mounting Through-hole, Both end tapped, Foot, Front flange, Rear flange, Double clevis Through-hole both end tapped

95
ATEX Compliant
Dual Rod Cylinder
Series 55-CXS/55-CXSW
Ø 6, Ø 10, Ø 15, Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32
How to Order
55-CXS W M 20 100
ATEX Made to order
category 2 — Standard
XB11 Long stroke type
Dual rod XC22 Fluoro rubber seals. Only for Ø 25
cylinder
Type Standard Strokes

– Single rod CXS (mm)
W Double rod Bore size Standard stroke -XB11
Ø6 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 —
Bearing
Ø 10 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 75 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 125, 150
M Slide bearing
L Ball bushing bearing Ø 15 100, 120, 125, 150
Ø 20 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,
Ø 25 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100 110, 120, 125, 150, 175, 200
Bore size Ø 32
6 6 mm CXSW (mm)
10 10 mm Bore size Standard stroke -XB11
15 15 mm
20 20 mm Ø6 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 —
25 25 mm Ø 10
10, 20, 30, 40, 50 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200
32 32 mm Ø 15
Ø 20
Ø 25 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 75, 100 125, 150, 175, 200
Port thread type Ø 32

Symbol Type Bore size
M thread Ø 6~Ø 20
–
Rc Ø 25~Ø 32
All other specifications are the same as the standard products
TF G Ø 25~Ø 32
Series CXS. For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
96
Series 55-CXS/55-CXSW
CXS Specifications
Bore size (mm) 6 10 15 20 25 32


30 to 300 30 to 800 30 to 700 30 to 600
Piston speed
mm/s mm/s mm/s mm/s
Piping port M5 X 0.8 G 1/8, R 1/8
Note) All other specifications Stroke adjustable range 0 to –5 mm to the standard stroke
are the same as the non ATEX type. Bearing Slide bearing, Ball bushing bearing (Same dimensions)
Cushion Rubber bumper
CXSW Specifications
Bore size (mm) 6 10 15 20 25 32

Piping port M5 X 0.8 G 1/8, R 1/8
Stroke adjustable range 0 to –10 mm (Extension side: 5 mm, Retraction side: 5 mm)
Bearing Slide bearing, Ball bearing (Same dimensions)
Cushion Rubber bumper
97
ATEX Compliant
Dual Rod Cylinder/Basic type
Series 55-CXSJ
Ø 15, Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32
How to Order
Port thread type

—
Rc1/8
Ø 32
TF G1/8
55 CXS J M 20 100
— Standard
Compact type XB11 Long stroke type
XC22 Fluororubber seals
Bearing
M Slide bearing
L Ball bushing bearing
Bore size/Standard stroke (mm)

Bore size Standard stroke (mm)
15, 20 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45,
25, 32 50, 60, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series CXSJ.
98
ATEX Compliant
Mechanically Jointed Rodless Cylinder
Series 55-MY1B
Basic Type/Ø 10, Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100
Note 1) This cylinder can be used in zones 1 and 2.
II 2G Ex h IIC T6..T5 Gb If the cylinder is used with SMC category 3 type auto switch,
then the cylinder can only be used in zone 2 and not in zone 1.
How to Order
Ø 10, Ø 16, Ø 20
Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80, Ø 100 55 MY1B 20 300
Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40 55 MY1B 25 300 Z
ATEX category 2 Basic Cylinder stroke (mm)
Maximum
Bore size Standard stroke∗ Long stroke manufacturable
Bore size stroke
10 10 mm 100, 200, 300, 400
500, 600, 700, 800 Strokes of 2001 to 3000 mm
16 16 mm 10, 16 900, 1000, 1200 (1 mm increments) exceeding 3000
20 20 mm 1400, 1600, 1800 the standard stroke
25 25 mm 2000
32 32 mm 20, 25, 32 ∗ The stroke can be Strokes of 2001 to 5000 mm
40 40 mm 40, 50, 63 manufactured in (1 mm increments) exceeding 5000
80, 100 1 mm increments the standard stroke
50 50 mm
from 1 mm stroke.
63 63 mm
Ordering example
80 80 mm ∗ Long stroke can be ordered the same as the standard stroke. 55-MY1B20-3000
100 100 mm ∗ Please be advised that with a stroke of 49 mm or less, there are cases where
auto switch mounting is not possible, and the performance of the air cushion
may decline.
Port thread type
M thread Ø 10, Ø 16, Ø 20
—
Rc Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40,
TN NPT Ø 50, Ø 63, Ø 80,
TF G Ø 100
Piping
— Standard
G Centralized piping type
Note) For Ø 10, only G is available.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series MY1B.
99
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-MY1M
Slide Bearing Type/Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40, Ø 50, Ø 63
How to Order
Slide bearing guide type 55 MY1M 20 G 300

ATEX category 2
Slide bearing guide type
Bore size
16 16 mm
20 20 mm
25 25 mm
32 32 mm
40 40 mm
50 50 mm
63 63 mm
Symbol
Port thread type
M thread Ø 16, Ø 20
—
Rc Ø 25, Ø 32,
TN NPT Ø 40, Ø 50,
TF G Ø 63
Piping
— Standard

Maximum
Bore size Standard stroke∗ Long stroke manufacturable
stroke
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600,
Strokes of 2001 to 3000 mm (1 mm increments)
16 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1200 3000
exceeding the standard stroke
1400, 1600, 1800, 2000
∗ The stroke can be
20, 25, 32 manufactured in 1 mm Strokes of 2001 to 5000 mm (1 mm increments)
5000
40, 50, 63 increments from 1 mm stroke. exceeding the standard stroke
Ordering example
∗ Long stroke can be ordered the same as the standard stroke. 55-MY1M20-3000
∗ Please be advised that with a stroke of 49 mm or less, there are cases where auto switch mounting is
not possible, and the performance of the air cushion may decline.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series MY1M.
100
ATEX Compliant
Series 55-MY1H
Linear Guide Type/Ø 10, Ø 16, Ø 20, Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40
How to Order
Ø 10, Ø 16, Ø 20 55 MY1H 16 300

Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40 55 MY1H 25 300 Z
ATEX category 2
Linear guide type Cylinder stroke (mm)

Bore Standard Maximum
Bore size Intermediate stroke Long stroke manufacturable
size stroke stroke
10 10 mm
Strokes of 60 to 590 mm
16 16 mm
10 (10 mm increments) other — —
20 20 mm 50, 100 than standard strokes
25 25 mm 150, 200
32 32 mm
16, 20 250, 300 (1 mm increments) exceeding 1000
40 40 mm 350, 400 Strokes of 51 to 599 mm
the standard stroke
450, 500 (1 mm increments) other
25, 32 550, 600 than standard strokes 1500
(1 mm increments) exceeding
40 the standard stroke
Port thread type ∗ Long stroke is not available for MY1H10.
Symbol Type Bore size Ordering example
∗ Intermediate stroke can be ordered the same as the standard stroke.
M thread Ø 10, Ø 16, Ø 20 55-MY1H10-60-M9BW
—
Rc ∗ Long stroke can be ordered the same as the standard stroke.
TN NPT Ø 25, Ø 32, Ø 40 55-MY1H20-800L-M9BW
TF G
Piping
— Standard
∗ For Ø 10, only G is available.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products

Series MY1H. For details, refer to the WEB catalogue
Symbol

101
ATEX Compliant Auto Switch Applicable Cylinder List
Model 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 55- 56- 56- 56- 55-
C76 C85 C95 C96 CP96 C55 JCM CG1 CS1 CQ2(Z) CXS/W MY1B MY1M MY1H CRB1 CRB2 CRBU2 CRQ2
Switch type
Note 1)
D-M9-588 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
(20 to 63) (125 to 200) (Except 50)
Note 2)
D-M9V-588 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
(125 to 200) (Except 50)
Note 1)
D-M9W-588 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
(20 to 63) (125 to 200) (Except 50)
Note 2)
D-M9WV-588 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
(125 to 200) (Except 50)
Note 3)
D-H7A2-588 앬 앬 앬
(20 to 63)
Note 4)
D-F7P-588 앬 앬 앬
(12 to 160)
Note 4)
D-F7PV-588 앬 앬 앬
(12 to 160)
D-F5P-588 앬 앬 앬
(160 to 250) (125 to 200)
D-Y7P-588 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
(160 to 200) (125 to 200) (50 to 100) (25 to 63)
D-Y7PV-588 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
(160 to 200) (125 to 200) (50 to 100) (25 to 63)
D-S7P-588 앬 앬 앬
(50 to 100) (20 to 40) (20 to 40)
D-S9P-588 앬 앬
(10, 15) (10, 15)
D-S9PV-588 앬 앬
(10, 15) (10, 15)
D-C73-588
앬
Note 3)
앬 앬
D-C80-588 (20 to 63)
D-A73-588
앬
Note 4)
앬 앬
D-A80-588 (12 to 160)
D-A73H-588
앬
Note 4)
앬 앬
D-A80H-588 (12 to 160)
D-A54-588 앬 앬 앬
D-A67-588 (160 to 250) (125 to 200)
D-A90-588
앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
D-A93-588 (16 to 25) (20 to 63) (125 to 200) (10 to 40) (16, 20)
D-A90V-588 Note 5)
앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
D-A93V-588 (125 to 200) (10 to 40) (16, 20)
D-90A-588 앬 앬 앬
D-93A-588 (125 to 200) (10, 15) (10, 15)
D-Z73-588 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
D-Z80-588 (160 to 200) (125 to 200) (50 to 100) (25 to 63)
D-R73-588 앬 앬 앬
D-R80-588 (50 to 100) (20 to 40) (20 to 40)
∗ ( ): Cylinder size
Note 1) 55-C85 Band mounting all sizes, and Rail mounting for 8 to 16 only.
Note 2) 55-C85 Band mounting only.
Note 3) 55-C85 Rail mounting only.
Note 4) 55-C85 Rail mounting only.
Note 5) 55-C85 Rail mounting only, for 16 to 25 only.
102
ATEX Compliant
Solid State Switch/Direct Mounting
D-M9N(V)·D-M9P(V)·D-M9B(V)-588
II 3G Ex ec IIC T5 Gc -10 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +60 °C Auto Switch Specifications
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T93 °C Dc IP67
PLC: Programmable Logic Controller
D-M9/D-M9V (With indicator light)
Auto switch part no. D-M9N D-M9NV D-M9P D-M9PV D-M9B D-M9BV
Grommet Electrical entry direction In-line Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular
Wiring type 3-wire 2-wire
2-wire load current is reduced Output type NPN PNP —
(2.5 to 40 mA). Applicable load IC circuit, Relay, PLC 24 VDC relay, PLC
Using flexible cable as standard Power supply 5/12/24 VDC (4.5 to 28 V) —
spec. Current consumption 10 mA or less —
Load voltage 28 VDC or less — 24 VDC (10 to 28V)
Load current 40 mA or less 2.5 to 40 mA
Internal voltage drop 0.8 V or less at 10 mA (2 V or less at 40 mA) 4 V or less
Leakage current 100 μA or less at 24 VDC 0.8 mA or less
Indicator light Red LED illuminates when turned ON.
Oilproof Flexible Heavy-duty Lead Wire Specifications

Auto switch model D-M9N(V) D-M9P(V) D-M9B(V)
Sheath Outside diameter [mm] 2.6
Number of cores 3 cores (Brown/Blue/Black) 2 cores (Brown/Blue)
Insulator
Outside diameter [mm] 0.88
Cross section [mm2] 0.15
Conductor
Strand diameter [mm] 0.05
Minimum bending radius [mm] (Reference) 17
Caution
Precautions How to Order
Fix the auto switch with the existing screw
installed on the auto switch body. The auto
switch may be damaged if a screw other
D M9 N V L 588
than the one supplied is used.
Auto switch part no. ATEX category 3
∗ This category 3 type auto
Wiring and output switch can only be used in
N 3-wire NPN zones 2 and 22.
P 3-wire PNP
B 2-wire
Electrical entry direction

— In-line
V Perpendicular
Lead wire length

— 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
SAPC 0.5 m + M8 - 3 pins pre-wired connector
MAPC 1 m + M8 - 3 pins pre-wired connector
SBPC 0.5 m + M8 - 4 pins pre-wired connector
MBPC 1 m + M8 - 4 pins pre-wired connector
SDPC 0.5 m + M12 - 4 pins pre-wired connector
MDPC 1 m + M12 - 4 pins pre-wired connector
Connector Specifications
Connector type M8 - 3 pins M8 - 4 pins M12 - 4 pins
1 4 1 2
Pin 2 1
arrangement
3 4
3 3 4
103
ATEX Compliant
2-Colour Solid State Switch/Direct Mounting
D-M9NW(V)·D-M9PW(V)·D-M9BW(V)-588
II 3G Ex ec IIC T5 Gc -10°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C RoHS
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T93°C Dc IP67 Auto Switch Specifications
D-M9W/D-M9WV (With 2 colour indicator light)
Grommet Auto switch part no. D-M9NW D-M9NWV D-M9PW D-M9PWV D-M9BW D-M9BWV
Electrical entry direction In-line Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular In-line Perpendicular
2-wire load current is reduced Wiring type 3-wire 2-wire
(2.5 to 40 mA). Output type NPN PNP —
Using flexible cable as standard Applicable load IC circuit, Relay, PLC 24 VDC relay, PLC
spec. Power supply 5/12/24 VDC (4.5 to 28 V) —
Current consumption 10 mA or less —
Load voltage 28 VDC or less — 24 VDC (10 to 28V)
Load current 40 mA or less 2.5 to 40 mA
Internal voltage drop 0.8 V or less at 10 mA (2 V or less at 40 mA) 4 V or less
Leakage current 100 μA or less at 24 VDC 0.8 mA or less
Operating position .................... Red LED illuminates.
Indicator light
Optimum operating position ...... Green LED illuminates.
Standard CE marking (EMC directive/RoHS directive)
Auto switch model D-M9NW(V) D-M9PW(V) D-M9BW(V)
Sheath Outside diameter [mm] 2.6
Number of cores 3 cores (Brown/Blue/Black) 2 cores (Brown/Blue)
Insulator
Outside diameter [mm] 0.88
Conductor
Strand diameter [mm] 0.05
Caution
How to Order
Precautions
Fix the auto switch with the existing screw
installed on the auto switch body. The auto D M9 N W V L 588
switch may be damaged if a screw other
than the one supplied is used.
∗ This category 3 type
Wiring and output auto switch can only
N 3-wire NPN be used in zones 2
P 3-wire PNP 2 colour display and 22.
B 2-wire
— In-line
V Perpendicular
Lead wire length

— 0.5 m
M 1m
L 3m
Z 5m
1 4 1 2
Pin 2 1
arrangement
3 4
3 3 4
104
ATEX Compliant
Solid State Switch/Band Mounting
D-H7A2-588 RoHS
II 3G Ex ec IIC T5 Gc -10°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C Auto Switch Specifications

D-H7 A2 (With indicator light)
Auto switch part no. D-H7A2
Grommet Wiring type 3-wire
Output type PNP
Applicable load IC circuit/Relay/PLC
Power supply 5/12/24 VDC (4.5 to 28 VDC)
Load current 80 mA or less
Internal voltage drop 0.8 V or less
Leakage current 100 μA or less at 24 VDC
Oilproof Heavy-duty Lead Wire Specifications

Auto switch model D-H7A2
Sheath Outside diameter [mm] Ø 3.4
Number of cores 3 cores (Brown/Blue/Black)
Insulator
Outside diameter [mm] Ø 1.1
Conductor
Strand diameter [mm] Ø 0.08
How to Order
D H7A2 588
switch can only be used in
Lead wire length zones 2 and 22.
Nil 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
1 4 1 2
2 1
Pin
arrangement
3 4
3 3 4
105
ATEX Compliant
Solid State Switch/Rail Mounting
D-F7P(V)-588 RoHS
D-F7P, D-F7PV (With indicator light)
Auto switch part no. D-F7P D-F7PV
Output type PNP

Auto switch model D-F7P(V)
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D F7P 588
zones 2 and 22.
— In-line
V Perpendicular
Lead wire length

— 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
1 4 1 2
2 1
Pin
arrangement 3 4
3 3 4
106
ATEX Compliant
Solid State Switch/Tie-rod Mounting

D-F5P-588 RoHS
D-F5P (With indicator light)
Auto switch part no. D-F5P
Output type PNP

Auto switch model D-F5P
Sheath Outside diameter [mm] Ø4
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D F5P 588
Lead wire length switch can only be used in
zones 2 and 22.
— 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
1 4 1 2
2 1
Pin
arrangement 3 4
3 3 4
107
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant Solid State Switch/Direct Mounting
D-Y7P(V)-588 RoHS
II 3G Ex ec IIC T5 Gc -10°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
II 3D Ex tc IIIC T93°C Dc IP67 Auto Switch Specifications
D-Y7P/D-Y7PV (With indicator light)
Auto switch part no. D-Y7P D-Y7PV
Grommet Electrical entry direction In-line Perpendicular
Wiring type 3-wire
Output type PNP

Auto switch model D-Y7P(V)
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D Y7P 588
Electrical entry direction zones 2 and 22.
— In-line
V Perpendicular
Lead wire length

— 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
SDPC 0.5m + M12 - 4 pins pre-wired connector
MDPC 1m + M12 - 4 pins pre-wired connector
1 4 1 2
2 1
Pin
arrangement 3 4
3 3 4
108
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant Solid State Switch / Direct Mounting
D-S7P-588 RoHS
D-S7P1/D-S7P2 (With indicator light)
Auto switch part no. D-S7P1 D-S7P2
Grommet/Connector Wiring type 3-wire
Electrical entry: In-line Output type PNP
Internal voltage drop 0.8 V or less at 10 mA (2 V or less at 40 mA)

Auto switch model D-S7P(V)
Insulator
Conductor
D-S7P2 D-S7P1 Strand diameter [mm] Ø 0.08
How to Order
Left hand mounting Right hand mounting

D S7P 588
Mounting switch can only be used in
zones 2 and 22.
1 Right hand mounting
2 Left hand mounting
Lead wire length

— 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
MBPC 1m + M8 - 4 pins pre-wired connector
1 4 1 2
2 1
Pin
arrangement 3 4
3 3 4
109
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant Solid State Switch/Direct Mounting
D-S9P-588
RoHS
D-S9P/D-S9PV (With indicator light)
D-S9P1 D-S9PV1
Auto switch part no.
Grommet D-S9P2 D-S9PV2
Electrical entry direction In-line Perpendicular
Wiring type 3-wire
Output type PNP
Internal voltage drop 0.8 V or less at 10 mA (2 V or less at 40 mA)

Auto switch model D-S9P(V)
Insulator
D-S9P2 D-S9P1 Conductor
How to Order
Left-hand Right-hand
mounting mounting
D-S9PV2 D-S9PV1
D S9P 588
Electrical entry direction switch can only be used in
zones 2 and 22.
— In-line
Left-hand Right-hand
mounting mounting V Perpendicular
Mounting
Lead wire length

— 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
1 4 1 2
2 1
Pin
arrangement 3 4
3 3 4
110
ATEX Compliant
Prior to Use
Auto Switch/Internal Circuit
Reed Auto Switch
No. q w e
2-wire (Reed switch) 2-wire (Reed switch) 2-wire (Reed switch)
Internal Circuit
Brown Brown Brown

protection circuit
protection circuit
protection box
Indicator Load Load Indicator Load
Contact
Contact
Contact
circuit circuit
Blue Blue Blue
Contact Protection Box: CD-P12

<Applicable switch models> Contact Protection Box Specifications
D-A73/A8, D-A73H/A80H, D-C73/C8, D-E73A/E80A, D-Z73/Z8, 9A, and Part no. CD-P12
D-A9/A9V type
Load voltage 24 VDC
The auto switches above do not have a built-in contact protection circuit.
Max. load current 50 mA
A contact protection box is not required for solid state auto switches due
to their construction. ∗ Lead wire length — Auto switch connection side 0.5 m
Load connection side 0.5 m
q Where the operation load is an inductive load.
w Where the wiring length to load is greater than 5 m. Contact Protection Box Internal Circuit
Therefore, use a contact protection box with the switch for any of the CD-P12 Brown Brown(+)
above cases: Choke coil
Zener
Auto switch side Load side
The contact life may be shortened (due to permanent energizing conditions.) diode
Even for the built-in contact protection circuit type (D-A54), use the contact Blue Blue(−)
protection box when the wiring length to load is very long (over 30 m) and
PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) with a large inrush current is used. Contact Protection Box/Dimensions
Contact Protection Box Connection

To connect a switch unit to a contact protection box, connect the lead wire from the side of the contact protection box marked SWITCH to the lead wire
coming out of the switch unit. Keep the switch as close as possible to the contact protection box, with a lead wire length of no more than 1 meter.
111
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant Reed Switch/Band Mounting
D-C73/D-C80-588
D-C7 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-C73
Grommet Applicable load Relay/PLC
Load voltage 24 VDC
Max. load current and range 5 to 40 mA
Internal circuit ∗1 w
Contact protection circuit None
Indicator light Red LED illuminates when turned ON
Standards CE marking
D-C8 (Without indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-C80
Applicable load Relay/PLC/IC circuit
AC AC
Load voltage 24 V or less 48 V
DC DC
Max. load current 50 mA 40 mA
Internal circuit ∗1 e
Internal resistance 1 Ω or less (Including 3 m lead wire)

Auto switch type D-C73/D-C80
Number of cores 2 cores (Brown, Blue)
Insulator
Conductor [mm]
Minimum bending radius of lead wire [mm] (Reference) 21
How to Order
D C 588
ATEX category 3
∗ This category 3 type auto switch can
only be used in zones 2 and 22.
Auto switch model number

73 With indicator light Lead wire length
80 Without indicator light — 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5 m (Except D-C80)
112
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant Reed Switch/Rail Mounting
D-A73(H)/D-A80(H)-588
D-A73, D-A73H (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-A73/D-A73H
Electrical entry: Perpendicular Load voltage 24 VDC
Load current range 5 to 40 mA
Standard CE marking
D-A80, D-A80H (Without indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-A80/D-A80H
Applicable load Relay/IC circuit/PLC
AC AC
Load voltage 24 V or less 48 V
DC DC


Auto switch type D-A73/D-A73H/D-A80/D-A80H
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D A 588
ATEX category 3
∗ This category 3 type auto switch
can only be used in zones 2 and
22.
73 With indicator light
80 Without indicator light
Lead wire length
— 0.5 m
Electrical Entry L 3m
— Perpendicular Z 5 m (Except A 80)
H In-line
113
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant Reed Switch/Tie-rod Mounting
D-A54/D-A67-588
D-A54 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-A54
Load voltage 24 VDC
Max. load current
5 to 50 mA
and range
Internal circuit ∗1 q
Contact protection circuit Built-in
Internal voltage drop 2.4 V or less (up to 20 mA) / 3.5 V or less (up to 50 mA)
Standard CE marking
D-A67 (Without indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-A67
Applicable load PLC/IC circuit
Load voltage MAX. 24 VDC
Max. load current and range 30 mA

Auto switch type D-A54/D-A67
Sheath Outside diameter [mm] Ø4
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D A 588
ATEX category 3

L 3m
Z 5 m (Except D-A67)
114
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant Reed Switch/Direct Mounting
D-A90(V)/D-A93(V)-588
D-A90, D-A90V (Without indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-A90/D-A90V
Grommet Applicable load IC circuit/Relay/PLC
AC AC
Load voltage 24 V or less 48 V or less
DC DC

Standard CE marking
D-A93, D-A93V (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-A93/D-A93V
Applicable load Relay/PLC
Load voltage 24 VDC
Max. load current and
5 to 40 mA
load current range
Internal voltage D-A 93 —— 2.4 V or less (up to 20 mA)/3 V or less (up to 40 mA)
drop D-A 93V —— 2.7 V or less

Auto switch type D-A90 (V)/D-A93 (V)
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D A 588
ATEX category 3
Auto switch model number 22.
Lead wire length
— 0.5 m
Electrical Entry L 3m
— In-line Z 5 m (Except A90)
V Perpendicular
115
ATEX Compliant
D-90A/D-93A-588
D-90A (Without indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-90A
Grommet Applicable load Relay/IC circuit/PLC
Lead wire: Heavy-duty cord AC
Load voltage 24 V
DC
Max. load current 50 mA
Standard CE marking
D-93A (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-93A
Applicable load Relay/PLC
Load voltage 24 VDC
Internal voltage drop 2.4V or less

Auto switch type D-90A/D-93A
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D A 588
ATEX category 3
Auto switch model number can only be used in zones 2 and
22.
Lead wire length
— 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
116
ATEX Compliant
D-Z73/D-Z80-588
D-Z73 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-Z73
Load voltage 24 VDC
Max. load current and range 5 to 40 mA
Internal voltage drop 2.4 V or less (up to 20 mA)/3 V or less (up to 40 mA)
Standard CE marking
D-Z80 (Without indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-Z80
Applicable load Relay/PLC/IC circuit
AC AC
Load voltage 24 V DC or less 48 V DC


Auto switch type D-Z73/D-Z80
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D Z 588
ATEX category 3

L 3m
Z 5 m (Except D-Z80)
117
ATEX Compliant
D-R73/D-R80-588
D-R73 (With indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-R731/D-R732
Electrical entry: In-line Load voltage 24 VDC
Standard CE marking
D-R80 (Without indicator light)
Auto switch model number D-R801/D-R802
Applicable load Relay/IC circuit/PLC
AC
Load voltage 24 V DC
D-R2 D-R1 Max. load current 50 mA


Left hand mounting Right hand mounting Auto switch type D-R73/D-R80
Insulator
Conductor
How to Order
D R 588
ATEX category 3
22.
80 Without indicator light Nil 0.5 m
L 3m
Z 5m
Mounting
118
119
ATEX Compliant
Rotary Actuator: Vane Type
Series 55-CRB1/56-CRB1
Sizes: 50, 63, 80, 100
How to Order
II 2G Ex h IIC T5..T4 Gb Note 1) This rotary actuator can be used in zones 1 and 2.
55-CRB1 B W 80 90 S
ATEX category 2 Thread Port
Mounting Size
50 – Rc(PT)
B Basic type
63 XF G(PF)
L∗ Foot type
Refer to Table 1 below 80 XN NPT
if only foot assembly is 100
required separately. Connecting port position
∗ Foot accesory is shipped - Side ports
together with the actuator
but not mounted on it. E Axial ports
Bolt
Table 1: Foot assembly part no. Shaft type
Model Unit part no. Double shaft
CRB1LW 50 P411020-5 W (long shaft key &
CRB1LW 63 P411030-5 four chamfers)
CRB1LW 80 P411040-5 Rotation
CRB1LW100 P411050-5 Classification Symbol Single vane Double vane
Optional Standard
90 90° 90°
180 180° — A port B port B port A port
270 270° — Side ports Axial ports

100 100° 100° Body end of the short-shaft side
190 190° —
Vane type
280 280° —
S Single vane
D Double vane
How to Order
II 3G Ex h IIC T6..T4 Gc Note 1) This rotary actuator can be used in zone 2 and not in zone 1.
56-CDRB1 B W 80 90 S
ATEX category 3 Thread Port
With auto switch unit – Rc(PT)
Size
- Without switch unit XF G(PF)
50
D With switch unit 63 XN NPT
Mounting
80
Table 1: Foot assembly part no. B Basic type 100 Connecting port position
L∗ Foot type – Side ports
Model Unit part no.
Refer to Table 1 below E Axial ports
CRB1LW 50 P411020-5 if only foot assembly is
CRB1LW 63 P411030-5 required separately.
∗ Foot accesory is shipped Bolt
CRB1LW 80 P411040-5 together with the actuator
CRB1LW100 P411050-5 but not mounted on it.
Shaft type
W Double shaft (long shaft key & four chamfers)
Rotation
Classification Symbol Single vane Double vane
Optional Standard
90 90° 90°
A port B port B port A port
180 180° —
Side ports Axial ports
270 270° —
Body end of the short-shaft side
100 100° 100°
190 190° —
280 280° — the standard products Series CRB1.
Vane type For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
S Single vane
D Double vane Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
120
Rotary actuator Vane Type Series 55-CRB1/56-CRB1
Specifications
Radial force
Model (Size) CRB1BW50 CRB1BW63 CRB1BW80 CRB1BW100 CRB1BW50 CRB1BW63 CRB1BW80 CRB1BW100
Vane type Single vane (S) Double vane (D)
Standard 90° +40 , 180° +40 , 270° +40 90°
+4
0
Rotation +4
+4 +4 +4
Optional 100° , 190° , 280°
0 0 0 100° 0
Fluid Air (non-lube)

Proof pressure [MPa) 1.5 MPa
Size: 100 Size: 80
Ambient
and fluid temperature 5 to 60 °C
Max. operating
1.0 MPa
orce pressure [MPa]
u st f Min. operating
Thr Size: 50
pressure [MPa] 0.15 MPa
Speed regulation
range (sec/90) 0.1 to 1
Note) All other specifications Allowable kinetic

energy [J] 0.082 0.12 0.398 0.6 0.112 0.16 0.54 0.811
are the same as the non ATEX type. Allowable
245 390 490 588 245 390 490 588
Shaft radial load [N]
load Allowable
196 340 490 539 196 340 490 539
thrust load [N]
JIS symbol Bearing type Ball bearing

Port position Side ports or axial ports
Side ports Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Size
Axial ports Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4 Rc, NPT, G 1/8 Rc, NPT, G 1/4
Mounting Basic, Foot
121
ATEX Compliant
Rotary Actuator: Vane Type
Series 55-CRB2/56-CRB2
Sizes: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40
How to Order
Standard 55 CRB2 B W 180 S E Z
ATEX category 2 Mounting Size Connecting port position

B Basic type 10 — Side ports
F Flange type 15 E Axial ports
∗ F: Except size 40 20
30
Shaft type 40
Double shaft with single flat (sizes 10 to 30)
W
Long shaft key, Short shaft with single flat (size 40)
Vane type
Single shaft (Long shaft) with single flat (sizes 10 to 30) S Single vane
S D Double vane
Long shaft with key (size 40)
Rotation
Symbol Single vane Double vane
90 90° 90°
100 — 100°
180 180° — All other specifications are the same as the
270 270° — standard products Series CRB2.
How to Order
II 3G Ex h IIC T5..T4 Gc
Without
magnet 56 CRB2 B W 180 S E Z
Connecting port position
— Side ports
With magnet 56 CDRB2 B W 180 S Z E Axial ports
ATEX category 3 Size

10 Vane type
15 S Single vane
20 D Double vane
With auto switch unit
30
Built-in magnet
40
Rotation
Mounting Symbol Single vane Double vane
B Basic 90 90° 90°
F Flange 100 — 100°
∗ F: Except size 40 180 180° —
270 270° —
Shaft type All other specifications are the same as

Double shaft with single flat (sizes 10 to 30) the standard products Series CRB2.
W
Long shaft with key, short shaft with single flat (size 40) For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
∗
Single shaft (Long shaft) with single flat (sizes 10 to 30)
S
Long shaft with key (size 40) Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
∗ Cannot be selected when mounting an auto switch
122
Rotary actuator Vane Type Series 55-CRB2/56-CRB2
Radial force Single Vane Specifications
Model (Size) CRB2BW10- S CRB2BW15- S CRB2BW20- S CRB2BW30- S CRB2BW40- S

Vane type Single vane
Rotation 90°, 180° 270° 90°, 180° 270° 90°, 180°, 270°
Proof pressure [MPa] 1.05 1.5
Ambient and fluid temperature 5 to 60 °C
ce Max. operating pressure [MPa] 0.7 1.0
for
rust Min. operating pressure [MPa] 0.2 0.15
Th
Speed regulation range (sec/90) Note 2) 0.03 to 0.3 0.04 to 0.3 0.07 to 0.5
Allowable kinetic
energy [J] 0.00015 0.001 0.003 0.02 0.04
Note) All other specifications Shaft Allowable radial load [N] 15 15 25 30 60

load Allowable thrust load [N] 10 10 20 25 40
are the same as the non ATEX type. Bearing type Ball bearing
Side ports M5 M3 M5 M3 M5
Size
Axial ports M3 M5
JIS symbol Shaft type Double shaft (with single flat on both shafts)
Double shaft (Long shaft
key & single flat)
Mounting Basic, Flange Basic
Double Vane Specifications
Model (Size) CRB2BW10- D CRB2BW15- D CRB2BW20- D CRB2BW30- D CRB2BW40- D

Vane type Double vane
Rotation 90°, 100°
Max. operating pressure [MPa] 0.7 1.0
Min. operating pressure [MPa] 0.2 0.15
Allowable kinetic energy [J] 0.0003 0.0012 0.0033 0.02 0.04
Shaft Allowable radial load [N] 15 15 25 30 60
load Allowable thrust load [N] 10 10 20 25 40
Bearing type Ball bearing
Port size (Side ports, Axial ports) M3 M5
Shaft type Double shaft (double shaft with single flat on both shafts)
Mounting Basic, Flange Basic
∗ The following notes apply to both Single and Double Vane Specification tables above.
Note 2) Make sure to operate within the speed regulation range.
Exceeding the maximum speed (0.3 sec/90) can cause the unit to stick or not operate.
123
ATEX Compliant
Rotary Actuator: Free-Mounting Type
Series 55-CRBU2/56-CRBU2
Sizes: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40
How to Order
II 2G Ex h IIC T4..T3 Gb Note 1) This rotary actuator can be used in zones 1 and 2.
55-CRBU2 W 10 180 S E Z
- Side ports
ATEX category 2
E Axial ports
Size
Free-mounting 10
15
20 Vane type
30 S Single vane
Shaft type 40 D Double vane
Double shaft with single

flat (sizes 10 to 30)
W Rotation
Long shaft key, Short shaft
with single flat (size 40) Symbol Single vane Double vane
90 90° 90°
Single shaft (Long shaft)
100 — 100°
S with single flat (sizes 10 to 30)
180 180° —
Long shaft with key (size 40) 270 270° —
How to Order
II 3G Ex h IIC T5..T4 Gc Note 1) This rotary actuator can be used in zone 2 and not in zone 1.
56-CDRBU2 W 10 180 S E Z
– Body size
ATEX category 3
E Axial position
∗ E not possible with switch unit
Size
With auto switch unit 10 Vane type
– Without switch unit 15 S Single vane
D With switch unit 20 D Double vane
30
40
Free-mounting Rotation
Symbol Single vane Double vane
90 90° 90°
Shaft type 100 — 100°
180 180° —
Double shaft with single
flat (sizes 10 to 30) 270 270° —
W
Long shaft key, Short shaft
with single flat (size 40)
Single shaft (Long shaft)
the standard products Series CRBU2.
S∗ with single flat (sizes 10 to 30) For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
Long shaft with key (size 40)
∗ Cannot be selected when mounting Refer to page 102 for applicable auto switches.
an auto switch
124
Rotary Actuator Free-Mounting Type Series 55-CRBU2/56-CRBU2
Radial force Single Vane Specifications
Model (Size) CRBU2W10- S CRBU2W15- S CRBU2W20- S CRBU2W30- S CRBU2W40- S

Rotation 90°, 180°, 270°
e Max. operating pressure [MPa] 0.7 1.0
tf orc Min. operating pressure [MPa] 0.2 0.15
Thrus
Allowable kinetic
energy [J] 0.00015 0.001 0.003 0.02 0.04
Shaft Allowable radial load [N] 15 25 30 60

load Allowable thrust load [N] 10 20 25 40
Note) All other specifications M5
Side ports
(dimensions, drawings, etc.) Port size
are the same as the non ATEX type. Axial ports M3 M5
Shaft type Double shaft (Double shaft with single flat on both shafts) Double shaft (Long shaft
key & Single flat)
JIS symbol
Double Vane Specifications
Model (Size) CRBU2W10- D CRBU2W15- D CRBU2W20- D CRBU2W30- D CRBU2W40- D

Rotation 90°, 100°
Max. operating pressure [MPa] 0.7 1.0
Min. operating pressure [MPa] 0.2 0.15
Allowable kinetic energy [J] 0.0003 0.0012 0.0033 0.02 0.04
Shaft Allowable radial load [N] 15 25 30 60
load Allowable thrust load [N] 10 20 25 40
Side ports M5
Port size
Axial ports M3 M5
Double shaft (Long shaft
Shaft type Double shaft (Double shaft with single flat on both shafts) key & Single flat)
∗ The following notes apply to both Single and Double Vane Specification tables above.
Note 1) Make sure to operate within the speed regulation range.
Exceeding the maximum speeds can cause the unit to stick or not operate.
125
ATEX Compliant
Compact Rotary Actuator: Rack-and-Pinion Type

Series 55-CRQ2
How to Order
55-CDRQ2B S 20 90
Cushion
Built-in magnet Size
ATEX category 2 Symbol Cushion
None
10 15 20 30 40
-
D Magnet Without cushion — — 앬 앬 앬
–
Rubber cushion 앬 앬 — — —
C Air cushion — — 앬 앬 앬
Shaft type
Single shaft with one chamfer 10, 15
S Rotation
Single shaft with key 20~40 Size
Double shaft with one chamfer 10, 15 90 80° to 100°
W 10 Port thread type 170° to 190°
Double shaft with key 20~40 180
15 Size Port thread
20 10, 15 – M5
30 – Rc 1/8
40 TF G 1/8
20, 30, 40
TN NPT 1/8
TT NPTF 1/8
Specifications
Size 10 15 20 30 40
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa 1 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 60 °C (with no freezing)
Cushion Rubber bumper Non attached, Air cushion
Angle adjustment Rotation end ±5°
Rotation 80° to 100°, 170° to 190°
Port size M5 x 0.8 Rc, G, NPT, NPTF 1/8
Output Nm at 0.5 MPa 0.3 0.75 1.8 3.1 5.3
Allowable Kinetic Energy and Rotation Time Adjustment Range
Allowable kinetic energy Stable operational

JIS symbol rotation time
Size Allowable kinetic energy (J) adjustment range
Cushion angle
Without cushion Rubber bumper With air cushion ∗ Rotation time (s/90˚)
10 — 0.25 x 10-3 — — 0.2 to 0.7
15 — 0.39 x 10-3 — — 0.2 to 0.7
20 0.025 — 0.12 40° 0.2 to 1
30 0.048 — 0.25 40° 0.2 to 1
40 0.081 — 0.40 40° 0.2 to 1
∗) Allowable kinetic energy with cushion
Maximum energy absorption with optimal adjustment of cushion needle

the standard products Series CRQ2.
126
ATEX Compliant
Compact Rotary Actuator: Rack-and-Pinion Type

Series 56-CRQ2
II 3G Ex h IIC T6..T6 Gc If the cylinder is used with SMC category 3 type auto switch,
How to Order
Without
magnet 56 CRQ2B S 20 90
With magnet 56 CDRQ2B S 20 90
ATEX category 3 Shaft type Cushion

S Single shaft Size
Symbol Cushion
W Double shaft 10 15 20 30 40
Built-in magnet for auto switch Without cushion — — 앬 앬 앬
–
Size Rubber cushion 앬 앬 — — —
10 C Air cushion — — 앬 앬 앬
15
20
30 Rotation
40 90 80° to 100°
180 170° to 190°
Port thread
Size Port thread
10, 15 — M5
— Rc 1/8
TF G 1/8
20, 30, 40
TN NPT 1/8
TT NPTF 1/8
Specifications
Size 10 15 20 30 40
Maximum operating pressure 0.7 MPa 1 MPa
Ambient and fluid temperature 0 to 60 °C (with no freezing)
Cushion Rubber bumper Non attached, Air cushion
Angle adjustment Rotation end ±5°
Rotation 80° to 100°, 170° to 190°
Port size M5 x 0.8 Rc, G, NPT, NPTF 1/8
are the same as the non ATEX type. Output Nm at 0.5 MPa 0.3 0.75 1.8 3.1 5.3
JIS symbol
the standard products Series CRQ2.
127
ATEX Compliant
Booster Regulator
Series 56-VBA10A to 43A
II 3G Ex h IIB T6 Gc For more details, other specifications,
II 3D Ex h IIIC T71°C Dc dimensions, see the specific catalogue.
How to Order
10A
Series VBA 2A
4A
56 VBA 40A 04 GN
Symbol Semi-standard
Symbol Specifications
ATEX category 3
— Standard product
Pressure unit on the product name label: psi
Z Pressure unit on the pressure gauge: MPa and psi
Body size
10A 1/4, Handle-operated type Pressure increase ratio: Twice
11A 1/4, Handle-operated type Pressure increase ratio: 2 to 4 times
20A 3/8, Handle-operated type
40A 1/2, Handle-operated type Options
22A 3/8, Air-operated type Pressure increase ratio: Twice Symbol Options
42A 1/2, Air-operated type — None
43A 1/2, Max. operating pressure 1.6 Mpa G Pressure gauge
N Silencer
S High-noise reduction silencer Note)
Thread type Note) GN Pressure gauge, Silencer
Symbol Thread type GS Pressure gauge, High-noise reduction silencer Note)
— Rc LN Elbow silencer Note)
F G LS Elbow high-noise reduction silencer Note)
VBA10A-02 N NPT GLN Pressure gauge, Elbow silencer Note)
T NPTF GLS Pressure gauge, Elbow high-noise reduction silencer Note)
VBA20A-03
Note) Thread types apply to the IN, Note) Refer to “Combination of Thread Type and Options.”
OUT, and EXH ports of the
VBA10A and to the IN, OUT, Port size
EXH, and gauge ports of the
Symbol Port size Applicable series
VBA2A and VBA4A. The
gauge ports of the VBA10A 02 1/4 VBA10A
are Rc thread type 03 3/8 VBA2A
regardless of the thread type
VBA22A-03 04 1/2 VBA4A
indication.
Combination of Thread Type and Options

Thread Options Semi-standard
Body size type – G N S GN GS LN LS GLN GLS – -Z
VBA42A-04 – 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 —
10A F 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 —
11A N 앬 앬 앬 — 앬 — 앬 — 앬 — 앬 앬
T 앬 앬 앬 — 앬 — 앬 — 앬 — 앬 앬
– 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 —
20A F 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 —
22A N 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
T 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
VBA40A-04
– 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 —
40A
F 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 —
42A
N 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
43A
T 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series VBA.
VBA43A-04 For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
128
Booster Regulator Series 56-VBA
Standard Specifications
Model VBA10A-02 VBA20A-03 VBA40A-04 VBA22A-03 VBA42A-04 VBA43A-04 VBA1111-02

Fluid Compressed air
Pressure increase ratio Twice 2 to 4 times
Note 1) Handle-operated with relief

Pressure adjustment mechanism Handle-operated with relief mechanism Air-operated
mechanism Note 1)
Max. flow rate Note 2) [l/min (ANR)] 230 1000 1900 1000 1900 1600 70
Set pressure range [MPa] 0.2 to 2.0 0.2 to 1.0 0.2 to 1.0 0.2 to 1.6 0.2 to 2.0
Supply pressure range [MPa] 0.1 to 1.0
Proof pressure [MPa] 3 1.5 1.5 2.4 3
Port size [Rc] 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 1/2 1/4
(IN/OUT/EXH: 3 locations)
Pressure gauge port size [Rc] 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/8 1/16
(IN/OUT: 2 locations)
Ambient and fluid temperature [°C] 2 to 50 (No freezing)
Installation Horizontal
Lubrication Grease (Non-lube)
Weight [kg] 0.84 3.9 8.6 3.9 8.6 8.6 0.98
Note 1) If the OUT pressure is higher than the set pressure by the handle, excessive pressure is exhausted from the back of the handle.
Note 2) Flow rate at IN= OUT= 0.5 MPa. The pressure varies depending on the operating conditions.
Options/Part No.
Pressure Gauge, Silencer (When thread type is Rc or G.)
Model VBA10A-02 VBA20A-03 VBA40A-04 VBA22A-03 VBA42A-04 VBA43A-04 VBA1111-02
Description VBA10A-F02 VBA20A-F03 VBA40A-F04 VBA22A-F03 VBA42A-F04 VBA43A-F04 EVBA1111-F02
Pressure gauge G G27-20-01 G36-10-01 KT-VBA22A-7 G36-10-01 G27-20-01 G27-20-01
Silencer N AN200-02 AN300-03 AN400-04 AN300-03 AN400-04 AN400-04 AN200-02
High-noise reduction silencer S ANA1-02 ANA1-03 ANA1-04 ANA1-03 ANA1-04 ANA1-04 ANA1-02
Note 1) In the case of option GN, two pressure gauges and one silencer are included as accessories.
Note 2) KT-VBA22A-7 is a pressure gauge with fittings. (Please order two units when using with IN and OUT.)
Note 3) Pressure unit of pressure gauge: MPa.
Pressure Gauge, Silencer (When thread type is NPT or NPTF.)

Model VBA10A-N02 ∗ VBA20A-N03 ∗ VBA40A-N04 ∗ VBA22A-N03 ∗ VBA42A-N04 ∗ VBA43A-N04 ∗ VBA1111-N02∗
VBA10A-T02 ∗ VBA20A-T03 ∗ VBA40A-T04 ∗ VBA22A-T03 ∗ VBA42A-T04 ∗ VBA43A-T04 ∗ NVBA1111-T02∗
Description ∗: when “-Z” ∗: when “-Z” ∗: when “-Z” ∗: when “-Z” ∗: when “-Z” ∗: when “-Z” ∗: when “-Z”
Pressure gauge ∗: no symbol Note 5) G27-20-01 G36-10-N01 KT-VBA22A-7N G36-10-N01 G27-20-N01 G27-20-01
G
Pressure gauge ∗: when “-Z” Note 4) G27-P20-01 G36-P10-N01 KT-VBA22A-8N G36-P10-N01 G27-P20-N01 G27-P20-01
Silencer N AN200-N02 AN300-N03 AN400-N04 AN300-N03 AN400-N04 AN400-N04 AN200-N02
High-noise reduction silencer S — ANA1-N03 ANA1-N04 ANA1-N03 ANA1-N04 ANA1-N04 —
Note 1) In the case of option GN, two pressure gauges and one silencer are included as accessories.
Note 2) KT-VBA22A-7N, KT-VBA22A-8N are pressure gauges with fittings. (Please order two units when using with IN and OUT.)
Note 3) Under the new measurement law, the pressure unit of “psi” on the pressure gauges cannot be used in Japan.
Note 4) Pressure unit of pressure gauge: psi
Note 5) Pressure unit of pressure gauge: MPa.
129
ATEX Compliant
Digital Pressure Switch for Air

Series 56-ISE70
II 3G Ex ec IIC T5 Gc 0°C ≤ Ta ≤ 50°C
II 3D Ex tC IIIC T53°C Dc IP67 RoHS
How to Order
1MPa 56 ISE70 02 43 M
ATEX category 3 Piping specifications Option 2
02 Rc 1/4 — None
N02 NPT 1/4 With bracket
F02 G 1/4 (ISO1179)
Output specifications
2 settings
27 A
NPN open collector 2 outputs (Pin no.: 2, 4)
Fixed setting: (The pressure set point for
switching the output signal is common to
43 NPN and PNP.)
NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no.: 4) + Note) Mounting screws
PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no.: 2) are not included.
Fixed setting
65
PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no.: 4)
Option 1
2 settings
67 — None
PNP open collector 2 outputs (Pin no.: 2, 4)
Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m),
S
straight
Unit specifications
— With display unit switching function Note 1) L
right-angled
M Note 2)
Fixed SI unit
Pressure unit: psi (Initial value)
P
With display unit switching function Note 1)
Note 1) Under the New Measurement Law, sales of
switches with the unit switching function are not
allowed for use in Japan. (Initial value: MPa)
Note 2) Fixed unit: Mpa
Specifications
Model 56-ISE70
Rated pressure range 0 to 1 MPa
Pressure display range/Set pressure range −0.1 to 1 MPa
Withstand pressure 1.5 MPa
Pressure display resolution/Minimum unit setting 0.01 MPa
Applicable fluid Air, Non-corrosive gas, Non-flammable gas
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC ± 10 %, Ripple (p-p) 10 % or less (with power supply polarity protection)
Current consumption 55 mA or less (at no load)
Follow the instructions given below when handling the pressure switch.
• Operating temperature range is 0 to 50 °C
• Do not expose the pressure switch to heat radiation from a heat source located nearby. It can cause malfunction.
• Do not expose the pressure switch/connector/cable to vibration and impact. Otherwise it can cause damage or malfunction.
• Protect the product from direct sunlight or UV light using a suitable protective cover.
• Do not disconnect the M12 connector while energized.
• Use only an ATEX approved M12 connector.
• For cleaning this product, use a clean and damp cloth, to prevent the buildup of an electrostatic charge.
• Ground properly to prevent the buildup of an electrostatic charge.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series ISE70.
130
ATEX Compliant
Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids

Series 56-ISE75/75H
II 3D Ex tC IIIC T54°C Dc IP67 RoHS
How to Order
10 MPa 56 ISE75 02 43 M
15 MPa 56 ISE75H 02 43 M
Piping specifications Option 2
ATEX category 3
02 Rc 1/4 — None
N02 NPT 1/4 With bracket
F02 G 1/4 (ISO1179)
Output specifications
2 settings
27
NPN open collector 2 outputs (Pin no.: 2, 4) A
Fixed setting: (The pressure set point for
switching the output signal is common to
43 NPN and PNP.)
NPN open collector 1 output (Pin no.: 4) + Note) Mounting screws
PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no.: 2) are not included.
Fixed setting
65
PNP open collector 1 output (Pin no.: 4) Option 1
2 settings — None
67
PNP open collector 2 outputs (Pin no.: 2, 4) Lead wire with M12 connector (5 m),
S
straight
Unit specifications
— With display unit switching function Note 1) L
right-angled
Note 2)
M Fixed SI unit
Pressure unit: psi (Initial value)
P
With display unit switching function Note 1)
Note 1) Under the New Measurement Law, sales of
switches with the unit switching function are not
allowed for use in Japan. (Initial value: MPa)
Note 2) Fixed unit: Mpa
Specifications
Model 56-ISE75 56-ISE75H

Rated pressure range 0 to 10 MPa 0 to 15 MPa
Pressure display range/Set pressure range 0.4 to 10 MPa 0.5 to 15 MPa
Withstand pressure 30 MPa 45 MPa
Pressure display resolution/Minimum unit setting 0.1 MPa
Applicable fluid Fluid or gas that will not corrode SUS304, SUS430 and SUS630
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC ± 10 %, Ripple (p-p) 10 % or less (with power supply polarity protection)
Current consumption 55 mA or less (at no load)
Follow the instructions given below when handling the pressure switch.
• Operating temperature range is − 5 to 50 °C
• Do not expose the pressure switch to heat radiation from a heat source located nearby. It can cause malfunction.
• Do not expose the pressure switch/connector/cable to vibration and impact. Otherwise it can cause damage or malfunction.
• Protect the product from direct sunlight or UV light using a suitable protective cover.
• Do not disconnect the M12 connector while energized.
• Use only an ATEX approved M12 connector.
• For cleaning this product, use a clean and damp cloth, to prevent the buildup of an electrostatic charge.
• Ground properly to prevent the buildup of an electrostatic charge.
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series ISE75/ISE75H.
131
ATEX Compliant
Pressure Switch/Reed Switch Type
Series 56-IS10
II 3G Ex h ec IIB T5 Gc
-5°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
II 3D Ex h tc IIIB T90°C Dc
How to Order
56 IS10 01
ATEX category 3 q w e
Symbol Description
— R
앬
q Thread type
N NPT
+
— None
앬
w Seal
S With seal
+
Set pressure — 0.1 to 0.4 MPa
a Semi-standard: Select one
range 6 Note1) 0.1 to 0.6 MPa option each in a through c.
+ Place them in alphanumerical
Semi-standard
order.
— 0.5 m
Lead wire
앬
e b
length
L 3m Example) 56-IS10-N01-6PZ
Z 5m
Note 1) Set pressure range of
+
6P(L, Z) is 0.2 to 0.6
Scale plate — MPa MPa (30 to 90 psi).
c
pressure unit P Note1) Both MPa and psi Note 2) This product is for
overseas use only ac-
cording to the new
Measurement Law.
(The SI unit type is pro-
vided for use in Japan.)
Specifications Switch Characteristics
Model 56-IS10-01 Max. contact capacity AC 2 VA, DC 2 W

Fluid Air/Inert gas Voltage AC/DC 24 V or less 48 V
Proof pressure 1.0 MPa Max. operating current 50 mA 40 mA
0.1 to 0.4 MPa
Set pressure range
Option: 0.1 to 0.6 MPa
Contacts 1a
Error of scale ±0.05 MPa or less
Hysteresis Fixed 0.08 MPa or less
Repeatability ±0.05 MPa or less
Grommet, Lead wire length: 0.5 m
Wiring specifications
Option: 3 m, 5 m
Enclosure Equivalent to IP40
Port size 1/8 All other specifications are the same as the
Weight 62 g standard products Series IS10.
132
ATEX Compliant Pressure Switch/
Reed Switch Type Series 56-IS10
Pressure Switch for Series AC-D
Pressure Switch
Body type: Standard Body type: Slim

56 IS10M 30 D (56-IS10M--D) (56-IS10M--1-D)
ATEX category 3 q w
· Semi-standard: Select one each for a to d.

· Semi-standard symbol: When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order.
Example) 56-IS10M-30-6LP-D
q
앬
Body size
Symbol Description Pressure switch
[Applicable AC size] Assembly Examples
20 30 40 50 60
[AC20] [AC30] [AC40] [AC40-06] [AC50, AC60]
Set pressure — 0.1 to 0.4 MPa 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬

a
range 6∗1 0.1 to 0.6 MPa 앪 앪 앪 앪 앪
+
— 0.5 m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
Semi-standard
Lead wire
b L 3m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
length
Z 5m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
w
앬 +
Pressure unit of — MPa 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
c
the scale plate P∗2 MPa/psi dual scale 앪 앪 앪 앪 앪
+
— Standard 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬: Without restrictions
d Body type
1 Slim 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앪: With restrictions (Refer to ∗1 and ∗2.)
∗1 The set pressure range for the 6P is 0.2 to 0.6 MPa (30 to 90 psi).
∗2 This product is for overseas use only according to the New Measurement Act.
(The SI unit type is provided for use in Japan.)
Caution on Mounting
Pipe threads are not provided on the face which connects with the other components. For use, a separate spacer (or spacer with bracket)
is required.
133
Series 56-IS10
Pressure Switch with T-Spacer
56 IS10T 30 03 D
ATEX category 3 q w e r
· Semi-standard: Select one each for a to c. IN OUT

Example) 56-IS10T-30-N03-6LP-D
q
앬
OUT q
Body size
Symbol Description (Port size)
[Applicable AC size]
Port size
20 30 40 50 60
[AC20] [AC30] [AC40] [AC40-06] [AC50, AC60] IN —
OUT —
— Rc 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 OUT q e
w
앬 Pipe thread type N NPT 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
F G 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
+ Assembly
01 1/8 앬 앬 — — — Examples
02 1/4 앬 앬 앬 앬 —
Port size
e
앬 (OUTq)
03 3/8 — 앬 앬 앬 앬
04 1/2 — — 앬 앬 앬
06 3/4 — — — 앬 앬
+
a
+
Semi-standard
Lead — 0.5 m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
r
앬 b wire L 3m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 Pressure switch with T-spacer
length Z 5m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
+
Pressure unit of — MPa 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬: Without restrictions
c
the scale plate P∗2 MPa/psi dual scale 앪 앪 앪 앪 앪 앪: With restrictions (Refer to ∗1 and ∗2.)
∗2 For the pipe thread type: NPT only
This product is for overseas use only according to the New Measurement Act.
Caution on Mounting
· Pipe threads are not provided on the face which connects with the other components. For use, a separate spacer (or spacer with
bracket) is required.
· The backflow of oil may occur when a spacer is used on the inlet side of the lubricator. Attach a check valve between the lubricator and
the product to prevent backflow.
134
ATEX Compliant Pressure Switch/
Reed Switch Type Series 56-IS10
Pressure Switch with L-Shaped Piping Adapter
56 IS10L 30 03 D
· Semi-standard symbol: When more than one specification is required, indicate in alphanumeric order. IN
Example) 56-IS10L-30-N03-6LP-D
q
앬
Body size
Symbol Description OUT
(Port size)
20 30 40 50 60
[AC20] [AC30] [AC40] [AC40-06] [AC50, AC60] Port size
IN —
— Rc 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 OUT e
w
+ Assembly Examples
01 1/8 앬 앬 — — —
02 1/4 앬 앬 앬 — —
Port size 03 3/8 — 앬 앬 — —
e
앬 (OUT) 04 1/2 — — 앬 앬 앬
06 3/4 — — — 앬 앬 Left Right
10 1 — — — — 앬
+ Pressure switch
Set pressure — 0.1 to 0.4 MPa 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 with L-shaped
a
range 6∗1 0.1 to 0.6 MPa 앪 앪 앪 앪 앪 piping adapter
+
Semi-standard
b wire L 3m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
r
앬 +
c
+
Mounting — Right 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬: Without restrictions
d
position R Left 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앪: With restrictions (Refer to ∗1 and ∗2.)
Caution on Mounting
is required.
135
Series 56-IS10
Pressure Switch with Piping Adapter
56 IS10E 30 03 D

IN OUT
(Port size)
Example) 56-IS10E-30-N03-6LP-D
q
앬
Port size
Body size
Symbol Description IN —
OUT e
20 30 40 50 60
[AC20] [AC30] [AC40] [AC40-06] [AC50, AC60]
— Rc 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 Assembly Examples
w
+
01 1/8 앬 — — — —
02 1/4 앬 앬 앬 — —
Port size 03 3/8 앬 앬 앬 — —
e
앬 (OUT) 04 1/2 — 앬 앬 — — Left Right
06 3/4 — — 앬 앬 앬
10 1 — — — 앬 앬 Pressure switch with
+ piping adapter
a
+
Semi-standard
b wire L 3m 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬
r
앬 +
c
+
Mounting — Right 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬: Without restrictions
d
position R Left 앬 앬 앬 앬 앬 앪: With restrictions (Refer to ∗1 and ∗2.)
Caution on Mounting
is required.
136
ATEX Compliant
ATEX Compliant 2 Port Steam Valve

Series 56-VND
II3G Ex h IIB T3 Gc
-5°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
How to Order
Body option Thread type
– Standard (Copper alloy) – Rc
S∗ Stainless steel body F G
∗ Threaded type only N NPT
T NPTF
Air operated 56-VND 2 0 D S 15A

ATEX category 3
Valve size Valve type Port size Option
Symbol Port – None
Orifice dia.
Symbol
(mm)
0 2 4 Symbol size B∗ With bracket
N.C. N.O. N.C. Rc With indicator light
6A 18 L (visual verification of operation)
1 Ø7 8A 14 With bracket and indicator light
BL∗ (visual verification of operation)
10A 38
10A 38 ∗ Brackets (for valve size 1/2/3/4 only)
2 Ø 15 12
15A will be assembled at the time of shipment.
3 Ø 20 20A 34 Bracket part no.
4 Ø 25 25A 1 Valve size 1: VN1-A16 (with thread) Valve
32A 11 4 size 2 to 4: VN-16
5 Ø 32
32F 11 4 B Flange 2 to 4
40A 11 2
6 Ø 40
40F 11 2 B Flange
(dimensions, drawings, etc.) 50A 2
are the same as the non ATEX type. 7 Ø 50
50F 2B Flange
JIS Symbol Model
Valve type N.C. N.O.
Valve size Normally closed Normally open Port size Orifice dia. Flow characteristics
Model Mass (kg)
12
Rc Flange Note) Ø (mm) Av x 10-6 m2
10
(P1) (P2) 56-VND10D-6A 18 – 26
56-VND10D-8A 14 – 7 28 0.3
56-VND1 1 2 1 2 56-VND10D-10A – 31
38
(A) (B) (A) (B) 56-VND20D-10A – 120
15 0.6
56-VND20D-15A 12 – 130
56-VND30D-20A 34 – 20 240 0.9
56-VND40D-25A 1 – 25 380 1.4
12 10
(P1) (P2) 56-VND50D-32A 11 4 – 2.3
32 440
2 56-VND50D-32F – 32 5.5
3
4 56-VND60D-40A 1
1 2 – 3.6
56-VND 5 1 2 1 2 40 920
6 (A) (B) (A) (B) 56-VND60D-40F – 40 7.2
7
56-VND70D-50A 2 – 5.7
– 50 1500
56-VND70D-50F 50 10.8
Note) The companion flange is JIS B 2210 10K (standard) or its equivalent.
Graph q Operating pressure - Pilot pressure
(N.O.) Valve Specifications
Fluid (Main piping) Steam
Fluid temperature –5 to 180 °C Note 1)
Ambient temperature –5 to 60 °C Note 1)
Operating pressure range 0 to 0.97 MPa
N.C. 0.3 to 0.7 MPa
Pressure 0.1 + 0.25 x (Operating pressure) to 0.25 + 0.25 x
External N.O. (Operating pressure) MPa Refer to below “Graph (1)”.
pilot air Lubrication Not required
Temperature -5 °C to 60 °C
ATEX Category II 3G TX -5 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 60 °C
Seal material PTFE
Note 1) No freezing
137
ATEX Compliant
Valve for Water and Chemical-base Fluids
(2/3 Port Air Operated Valve)
Series VCC
II 2GD c 75 °C (T6X)
5 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 80 °C
How to Order
Valve
VCC1 2 00
Passage number Port size
VCC12(D)-00 VCC13-00
2 2 port valve 00 For manifold mounting
3 3 port valve Note) 02 Rc 1/4 (for single unit) Note)
2D 2 port/Diaphragm type (Applicable for 2 liquid paint) 02F G 1/4 (for single unit) Note)
Note) Pressure cannot be applied from a 3 port valve Note) Part number for sub-base
RETURN port. For 2 port: VCC12-S- 02 [Rc 1/4]
02F [G 1/4]
For 3 port: VCC13-S- 02
02F
[Rc 1/4]
[G 1/4]
VCC12(D)-02(F) VCC13-02(F)
Manifold
Standard VV M CC1 06 06 C4
Type (Passage number) Pilot port fitting size
2 2 port valve, Cleaning valve C4 Ø 4 one-touch fitting (Antistatic)
3 3 port valve C6 Ø 6 one-touch fitting (Antistatic)
M 2/3 port valves mixed mounting
2 port valve mountable number 3 port valve mountable number

00 No 2 port valves used 00 No 3 port valves used
02 2 pcs. (colours) 02 2 pcs. (colours)
04 4 pcs. (colours) 04 4 pcs. (colours)
Note) Maximum mountable valve number: 40 pcs.

(total of 2 port and 3 port valves)
Circuit example
2 port valve 3 port valve 2 port valve
1 pc.
3 pcs.
RETURN RETURN RETURN 3 port valve
5 pcs.
IN PA IN PA IN PA IN PA IN PA IN PA 1 pc.
3 pcs.
5 pcs.
OUT
2 pcs.
4 pcs.
6 pcs.
2 pcs.
IN PA IN PA IN PA 4 pcs.
IN PA IN PA IN PA
RETURN RETURN RETURN 6 pcs.
138
Valve for Water and Chemical-base Fluids Series VCC
How to Order
Manifold
With gate valve VV M CC1 06 06 C4 G 04
Passage number
Gate valve and cleaning valve mountable number
2 2 port valve, Cleaning valve
02 Cleaning valve (2 port valve): 1 pc. + Gate valve: 1 pc.
M 2/3 port valves mixed mounting
04 Cleaning valve (2 port valve): 3 pcs. + Gate valve: 1 pc.
06 Cleaning valve (2 port valve): 5 pcs. + Gate valve: 1 pc.
2 port valve
mountable number Pilot port fitting size
00 No 2 port valves used 3 port valve C4 Ø 4 one-touch fitting (Antistatic)
02 2 pcs. (colours) mountable number C6 Ø 6 one-touch fitting (Antistatic)
04 4 pcs. (colours) 00 No 3 port valves used
02 2 pcs. (colours)
04 4 pcs. (colours) ∗ The gate valve and cleaning valve (2 port valve) are not
included. They are ordered separately. (Gate valve is
Note) Maximum mountable valve equivalent to 2 port valve.)
number: 40 pcs. (total of 2 ∗ When cleaning valve number is an even number, use the
port, 3 port and gate valves) blanking plug for 2 port valve.
Circuit example
Gate/Cleaning valve 2/3 port valve
Cleaning valve
RETURN RETURN RETURN
Cleaning valve
IN PA IN PA IN PA IN PA IN PA IN PA
OUT
Cleaning valve
Gate valve OUT

IN PA PA IN PA IN PA IN PA IN PA
RETURN RETURN RETURN
Gate valve
SUS316L Stainless steel fitting
VCK K 0604 02F

Shape Port size
H Male connector 02F G 1/4
K 40° swivel elbow ∗ G 1/4 bottom seal
has a special shape.
L 90° swivel elbow
Applicable tubing
(O.D. x I.D.)
0604 6 x 4
0806 8 x 6
1075 10 x 7.5
1008 10 x 8 VCKH VCKK VCKL
1209 12 x 9 Male connector 40° swivel elbow 90° swivel elbow
Option
Blanking Plug Assembly
Type Model Description Qty.
Blanking plug (with O-ring) 1
For a 2 port valve VVCC12-10A-1
Hexagon socket head plug (R 1/4) 1
Blanking plug (with O-ring) 1
For a 3 port valve VVCC13-10A-1
Hexagon socket head plug (R 1/4) 2
139
Series VCC
Specifications
Model VCC12 VCC13 VCC12D

Passage number 2 port 3 port 2 port (Diaphragm type)
Construction Poppet seal (PEEK resin + Stainless steel) Poppet seal (PEEK resin + Stainless steel)
(Fluid contact material) + Special fluororesin sliding part + Special fluororesin diaphragm
Fluid Water/Chemical-based paint, Ink, Cleaning solvent (Water, Butyl acetate), Air
Operating pressure range [MPa] 0 to 1.0 (Instantaneous pulsation pressure: 1.2) 0 to 0.7 (Instantaneous pulsation pressure: 0.9)
Withstand pressure [MPa] 2 1.5
Pilot pressure [MPa] 0.4 to 0.7
Orifice size [mm] Ø 3.8
Effective area [mm2] 6
Fluid temperature [°C] 5 to 50
Ambient temperature [°C] 5 to 50
Explosion proof construction Explosion protection II 2GD c 75 °C (T6X), 5 °C ≤ Ta ≤ 80 °C
Lubrication Not possible (Default lubricant: White vaseline)
Mounting orientation Unrestricted
Valve leakage (cm3/min) 1 or less (3 port valve IN RETURN: 20 or less) Note 1) 1 or less Note 2)
Note 1) Supply pressure: Valve leakage at 1.2 MPa (for air)

Note 2) Supply pressure: Valve leakage at 0.9 MPa (for air)
SUS316L Stainless Steel Fitting Specifications
Applicable tubing Nylon/Fluoro tubing

Fluid Water/Chemical-based paint, Ink, Cleaning solvent (Water, Butyl acetate), Air
Max. operating pressure (at 20 °C) [MPa] 1.0
Ambient and fluid temperature [°C] 0 to 60 °C
Weight
VCC12 (2 port) 37 g
Valve
VCC13 (3 port) 48 g
For 2 port 29 g
Blanking plug assembly
For 3 port 45 g 2 valves per station (30 mm pitch)
2/3 port valves mixed mounting
For 2 port (2 stations, one-piece style) 150 g Resin manifold block
Manifold block
For 3 port (2 stations, one-piece style) 254 g
∗ Valves are not attached.
For gate valve 300 g
For 2 port 409 g
End plate For 3 port 495 g
For 2/3 port mixed mounting 452 g 50
Ø6 24 g
Ø8 25 g
VCKH 212
Ø 10 33 g
0
12
Ø 12 36 g
Weight: 2700 g 2 port ··· 6 valves
Ø6 25 g 3 port ··· 6 valves
ATEX Explosion protection Fitting ··· 19 pcs.
Ø8 26 g
Fittings VCKK
Ø 10 32 g
Ø 12 37 g
Ø6 29 g
Ø8 30 g
VCKL
Ø 10 37 g
Ø 12 41 g
140
Valve for Water and Chemical-base Fluids Series VCC
Manifold Specifications
Series VCC
1. How to Order a Manifold
VV M CC1 06 10 C4 G04
q w e r t ∗ This “How to Order” is that of the example below.
q Type (Passage number) w 2 port valve r Pilot port fitting size

2 2 port valve mountable number Note 1) C4 Ø 4 one-touch fitting
3 3 port valve 00 Without 2 port valve C6 Ø 6 one-touch fitting
M 2/3 port valves mixed mounting 02 2 pcs. (colours)
04 4 pcs. (colours)
40 40 pcs. (colours) Note 2)
e 3 port valve t Gate valve and cleaning valve mountable number Note 1)
mountable number Note 1) – Without gate valve Note 3)
00 Without 3 port valve G02 Cleaning valve: 1 pc. + Gate valve: 1 pc.
02 2 pcs. (colours) G04 Cleaning valve: 3 pcs. + Gate valve: 1 pc.
04 4 pcs. (colours) G06 Cleaning valve: 5 pcs. + Gate valve: 1 pc.
40 40 pcs. (colors) Note 2)

Note 1) Two valves can be installed per manifold block. Total valve number must be an even number.
Note 2) Maximum valve number is forty (40) valves (colours) by a total of w + e + t.
Note 3) When “Without gate valve” is selected, use 2 port valve of w as a cleaning valve.
2. How to Order a Valve 3. How to Order the Blanking Plug 4. How to Order the SUS316L Stainless Steel Fitting
VCC1 2 00 VVCC1 2 10A 1 VCK K 1075 02F

q q q w
q Type (Passage number) q Type (Passage number) q Type (Shape) w Piping port
2 2 port valve 2 For 2 port valves K 40° swivel elbow 1209 Piping port for Ø 12 x Ø 9
3 3 port valve 3 For 3 port valves L 90° swivel elbow 1008 Piping port for Ø 10 x Ø 8
2D 2 port/Diaphragm type Used when the number of valves used H Male connector 1075 Piping port for Ø 10 x Ø 7.5
on the manifold base is an odd number. 0806 Piping port for Ø 8 x Ø 6
0604 Piping port for Ø 6 x Ø 4
Cleaning valve
with gate valve
Mountable number
∗ In this case, four (4) 2 port valve 3 port valve
cleaning valves Mountable number Mountable number
(including gate valve) ∗ In this case, six (6) 2 port valves ∗ In this case, ten (10) 3 port valves
Stations 2 1 1 3 5 1 3 5 7 9
Pilot port fitting
IN port
OUT port
D side U side
IN port
RETURN port
Stations 3 Gate 2 4 6 2 4 6 8 10
Cleaning unit (with gate valve) side Standard unit side
141
ATEX Compliant
55-LVA10 and 55-LVA12
II2G Ex h IIB T5..T4 Gb
0°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
High Purity Chemical Valve 55-LVA2□, 55-LVA3□, 55-LVA4□, 55-LVA5□,
Series 55-LVA
55-LVA6□ and 55-LVA200
II2D Ex h IIIB T85..T125°C Db
0°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
Note) The manifold type is not available with
ATEX certification
How to Order Valves (Single Type)
55-LVA 2 0 02 A
Option
Body class
– None
Symbol Body class Orifice diam.
1 With flow rate adjustment
1 1 Ø2
2 With by-pass
2 2 Ø4
3 With flow rate adjustment & by-pass
3 3 Ø8
4 With indicator
4 4 Ø 12
Note) Refer to “Variations” in the table
5 5 Ø 20 below for option combinations.
6 6 Ø 22 Options can not be combined each
other.
Valve type Material
0 N.C. Port size Actuator section Dia- Applicable option
Symbol Body Note
1 N.O. Symbol Port size Body class End plate phragm 1 2 3 4
2 Double acting 01 1/8 PPS
1 A SUS PTFE —
Note) Refer to 02 1/4 —
“Variations” in the
table below for 01 1/8 PPS PTFE Except 55-LVA50/60
2 B PPS
valve type 02 1/4
combinations. 02 1/4
3 C PFA PPS PTFE Except 55-LVA10/50/60
03 3/8
03 3/8 PPS
D SUS NBR Except 55-LVA60
4 —
04 1/2
04 1/2 PPS
5 E SUS EPR Except 55-LVA60
06 3/4 —
10 1 6 Hydrofluoric acid
F PFA PVDF PTFE compatible
(Only 55-LVA40)
Specifications
Model
55-LVA10 55-LVA20 55-LVA30 G PPS PPS NBR Except 55-LVA50/60
55-LVA40 55-LVA50 55-LVA60 Thread type
Fluid Temperature class T6 0 to 50 Symbol Thread type H PPS PPS EPR Except 55-LVA50/60
temperature (°C) Temperature class TX 0 to 100 – Rc
Ammonium hydroxide
Ambient Temperature class T6 0 to 50 N NPT
PFA compatible
N PPS PTFE
temperature (°C) Temperature class TX 0 to 60 F G Except 55-LVA10/50/60
Variations
Model 55-LVA10 55-LVA20 55-LVA30 55-LVA40 55-LVA50 55-LVA60 Note) Refer to the “Material” table for the
Orifice diame applicable optional body materials.
Body ter Ø2 Ø4 Ø8 Ø 12 Ø 20 Ø 22
materi N Port size
al ote 1) Stainless 1/8 1/4 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 3/8 1/2 1/2 3/4 1
steel (S
US316)
PPS
Valv
e ty
pe PFA
Type Symbol
Basic type
N.C.
PA PB PA
B AB AB
N.O.
A
PB
N.C. N.O. Double Double
acting acting
With flow rate PA PA
adjustment N.C.
B A B A
PB
Double
N.C. Double acting acting
With by-pass PA PA N.C.
B A B A
Body material PB Double
Only PFA N.C. Double acting acting
With flow rate PA PA
adjustment & N.C.
by-pass B A B A
Body material PB Double
Only PFA N.C. Double acting acting
With indicator PA
B A N.C.
N.C.
142
High Purity Chemical Valve Series 55-LVA
Model 55-LVA10 55-LVA20 55-LVA30 55-LVA40 55-LVA50 55-LVA60

Orifice diameter Ø2 Ø4 Ø8 Ø 12 Ø 20 Ø 22
Port size 1/8, 1/4 1/8, 1/4 1/4, 3/8 3/8, 1/2 1/2, 3/4 1
-6
Flow Av x 10 m2 1.7 8.4 40.8 79.2 144 192
characteristics Cv 0.07 0.35 1.7 3.3 6 8
Withstand pressure [MPa] 1
Operating pressure [MPa] 0 to 0.5 0 to 0.4
Note 2)
Back pressure N.C./N.O. 0.15 or less 0.3 or less 0.2 or less
[MPa] Double acting 0.3 or less 0.4 or less 0.3 or less
Valve leakage [cm3/min] 0 (with water pressure)
Basic type Pilot air pressure [MPa] 0.3 to 0.5
Pilot port size M5 X 0.8 Rc 1/8, NPT 1/8, G 1/8
Fluid Temperature class T6 0 to 50

temperature [°C] Temperature class TX 0 to 100 Note 1)
Ambient Temperature class T6 0 to 50

temperature [°C] Temperature class TX 0 to 60
Stainless steel
(SUS) 0.12 0.18 0.44 0.86 1.67 1.96
Weight [kg] PPS 0.05 0.08 0.18 0.32 — —
PFA — 0.09 0.20 0.35 — —
Note 1) 0 to 60 °C when the diaphragm is NBR or EPR.
Note 2) The N.O. type is not available for 55-LVA10.
Note 3) Contact SMC if the valve will be used with vacuum and B A flow.
With flow rate adjustment

Piping
Caution
1. Avoid using metal fittings with a resin body (taper threads).
This can cause damage to the valve body.
143
Series 55-LVA
Dimensions
Body material: Stainless steel
Basic type
L
55-LVA10 2-F
K
2-Q
Sensor
(Vent port) R
PB
H
PA
C
G
N
B A
C
B
C
B A 2-P
B A
B B
A
55-LVA20 55-LVA60
With flow rate With indicator

(Max. S)
adjustment
Dimensions (mm) Dimensions (mm)

W
Model S Model W
55-LVA2 14.5 55-LVA20 63.7
55-LVA3 24.4 55-LVA30 89.1
55-LVA4 29 55-LVA40 109.9
B A B A
55-LVA5 34.5 55-LVA50 140.5
55-LVA6 36 55-LVA60 147.8
Dimensions (mm)
Model A B C E F G H K L N P Q R
55-LVA1 20 33 49.5 10 M5 X 0.8 X 4 27.5 11 — 13 27.5 Rc 1/8, 1/4 Ø 4.2

NPT 1/8, 1/4 M5 X 0.8
G 1/8, 1/4
55-LVA2 30 33 57 10 M X 0.8 X 5 31 13 22 22 26 M3 x 0.5
Rc 1/4, 3/8
55-LVA3 36 47 78.6 13 M6 X 1.0 X 8 42.5 17.5 37 26 38.5 NPT 1/4, 3/8
G 1/4, 3/8
Rc 3/8, 1/2
55-LVA4 46 60 95.4 16 M8 X 1.25 X 10 54.5 18 47.5 33.5 47.5 NPT 3/8, 1/2 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8
G 3/8, 1/2
NPT 1/8 NPT 1/8
Rc 1/2, 3/4 G 1/8 G 1/8
55-LVA5 58 75 122.5 19 M8 X 1.25 X 10 61.5 27.5 60 43 55.5 NPT 1/2, 3/4
G 1/2, 3/4
Rc 1
55-LVA6 58 85 129.8 24 M8 X 1.25 X 10 69 27.5 60 43 62.8 NPT 1
G1
144
High Purity Chemical Valve Series 55-LVA
Dimensions
Body material: PPS

Basic type
2-Q
Sensor (vent port) R
PB
PA H
C
G
N
B A
SMC
E
J
B
2-P
D
L
4-øM K
55-LVA10 With flow rate adjustment With indicator

(Max. S)
49.5
B A
Dimensions
W
Dimensions (mm) (mm)

2-Ø2
Model S Model W
Depth 4
55-LVA2 14.5 55-LVA20 64.2
55-LVA3 24.4 55-LVA30 88.1
L
B A B A
SMC 55-LVA4 29 SMC 55-LVA40 110.4
55-LVA5 34.5 55-LVA50 147
K
Dimensions (mm)
Model A B C D E G H J K L M N O P Q R
Rc 1/8, 1/4
55-LVA1 20 33 49.5 — 10 27.5 11 — 4 11 — 27.5 — NPT 1/8, 1/4 M5 X 0.8 Ø 4.2
G 1/8,1/4
Rc 1/8
55-LVA20 30 36 54.7 44 11 32 — 4 20 37 3.5 27 14.8 NPT 1/8 Ø 2.4
Rc 1/4 G 1/8
NPT 1/4
G 1/4
55-LVA2 12 30 36 57.5 44 11 31.5 13 4 20 37 3.5 26.5 — M5 X 0.8 M3 X 0.5
Rc 3/8
55-LVA3 36 47 77.6 56 15 41.5 17.5 7.5 34 46 5.5 37.5 — NPT 3/8
G 3/8
Rc 1/2 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8
55-LVA4 46 60 95.9 68 22 55 18 8 42 57 5.5 48 — NPT 1/2 NPT 1/8 NPT 1/8
G 1/2 G 1/8 G 1/8
Rc 3/4
55-LVA5 58 75 129 84 26 68 27.5 8 56 71 6.5 62 — NPT 3/4
G 3/4
145
Series 55-LVA
Dimensions
Body material: PFA
Basic type
2-R
Sensor (Vent port) U
PB
H
PA
C
G
N
B A
SMC
E
J
B 2-P
A
D
L
4-øM
K
With flow rate With indicator

(Max. S)
adjustment
W
Dimensions (mm) Dimensions (mm)

Model S Model W
55-LVA2 14.5 55-LVA20 67.7
B A 55-LVA3 24.4 B A 55-LVA30 92.1
55-LVA4 29 55-LVA40 110.4
SMC SMC
Dimensions (mm)
Model A B C D E G H J K L M N P Q R U
Rc 1/4
55-LVA2 30 36 61 44 14.5 35 13 4 20 37 3.5 30 NPT 1/4 — M5 X 0.8 M3 X 0.5
G 1/4
Rc 3/8
55-LVA3 36 47 81.5 56 19 45.5 17.5 7.5 34 46 5.5 41.5 NPT 3/8 —
G 3/8 Rc 1/8 Rc 1/8
Rc 1/2 NPT 1/8 NPT 1/8
55-LVA4 46 60 95.9 68 22 55 18 8 42 57 5.5 48 NPT 1/2 — G 1/8 G 1/8
G 1/2
146
ATEX Compliant 55-LVA10 and 55-LVA12
0°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
Air Operated Type 55-LVA2□, 55-LVA3□, 55-LVA4□, 55-LVA5□,

55-LVA6□ and 55-LVA200
Series 55-LVA
II2D Ex h IIIB T85..T125°C Db
0°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
Note) The manifold type is not available with
ATEX certification
Model 55-LVA200
Orifice diameter Ø4
Port size 1/4
-6
Flow Av x 10 m2 7.2
characteristics Cv 0.3
Withstand pressure [MPa] 1
Operating pressure [MPa] 0 to 0.5
Valve leakage [cm3/min] 0 (with water pressure)
Pilot air pressure [MPa] 0.4 to 0.5
Pilot port size M5 X 0.8
Max. operating frequency [Hz] 1.0
Fluid Temperature class T6 0 to +50

temperature [°C] Temperature class TX 0 to +100
Ambient Temperature class T6 0 to +50
temperature [°C] Temperature class TX 0 to +60
Weight [kg] 0.162
How to Order Valve
55-LVA 2 0 0 02 C
Material
PA Symbol Body Actuator section Diaphragm
Body class C PFA PPS PTFE
R Symbol Body class Orifice dia.
A P 2 2 Ø4 Thread type
Symbol Thread type
– Rc
N.C. N NPT
Valve type
0 N.C Port size
Symbol Port size
02 1/4
147
Series 55-LVA
Dimensions
2 x M5 x 0.8
Depth 6
20
3-Rc1/4
(3-NPT1/4) M5 x 0.8
Pilot port
M3 x 0.8
PB
Breathing port
13
PA
72
46
41
22.5
30
52.5 6.5
R P
30
41
26
148
Process Pump. Automatically operated type
Air operated type
Series 55-PA3000/5000
Automatically operated type (internal switching type)
Air operated type (external switching type)
For 55-PA30: II2G Ex h IIB T6 Gb

II2D Ex h IIIB T68°C Db
0°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
How to Order
55 PA 3 1 1 0 03
ATEX category 2
Body size Options
Symbol Body size Applicable actuation
3 3/8 standard Symbol Options Automatically
Air operated type
5 1/2 standard operated type
— None 앬 앬
N With silencer 앬 —
Liquid contact body material ∗ A silencer of 2504-002 (NPT: 2504-N002) is provided.
Symbol Body material
1 ADC12 (Aluminum)
2 SCS14 (Stainless steel)
Port size
Applicable model
Symbol Port size
Diaphragm material PA3000 PA5000
03 3/8" 앬 —
Applicable actuation
Symbol Diaphragm material Automatically 04 1/2" — 앬
operated type
Air operated type 06 3/4" — 앬
1 PTFE 앬 앬
2 NBR 앬 —
Thread type
∗ Dimensions are the same as the standard products.
Symbol Type
Actuation — Rc
Symbol Actuation
N NPT
0 Automatically operated type
F G
3 Air operated type
T NPTF
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series PA3000/5000.
149
ATEX Compliant Process Pump
Automatically operated type (Internal switching type)/
Air operated type (External switching type)
Series 56-PA3000/5000
For 56-PA30 : II3G Ex h IIB T6 Gc
II3D Ex h IIIB T68°C Dc
1
For 56-PA5 2 0 : II3G Ex h IIB T6 Gc
1
For 56-PA5 2 3 : II3G Ex h IIB T6 Gc
0°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
How to Order
앬 Fluid contact body material: Aluminum, Stainless steel
56 PA 3 1 1 0 03
ATEX category 3 Body size Options
Symbol Body size Applicable model
3 3/8 standard Symbol Options Automatically
Air operated type
5 1/2 standard operated type
— None 앬 앬
Liquid contact body material N With silencer 앬 —
Symbol Body material
1 ADC12 (Aluminum) Port size
2 SCS14 (Stainless steel)
Applicable model
Symbol Port size
Diaphragm material PA3000 PA5000
Applicable model 03 3/8" 앬 —
Symbol Diaphragm material Automatically 04 1/2" — 앬
Air operated type 06 3/4" — 앬
operated type
1 PTFE 앬 앬
2 NBR 앬 — Thread type
∗ Dimensions are the same as the standard products. Symbol Type
— Rc
Actuation N NPT
Symbol Actuation F G
0 Automatically operated type T NPTF
3 Air operated type
앬 Fluid contact body material: Polypropylene
56 PA 5 0 1 0 04
ATEX category 3 Option
Operating method
Body size
Symbol Option Automatically
Symbol Body size Air operated
operated
5 1/2 standard
— None 앬 앬
N With silencer∗1 앬 —
Fluid contact body material
Symbol Fluid contact body material ∗1 For AIR EXH: AN20-02
0 PP (Polypropylene) (For thread types, leave the box blank or enter N.)
Port size
Diaphragm material Symbol Port size
Operating method 04 1/2"
Diaphragm
Symbol Automatically 06 3/4"
material Air operated
operated
1 PTFE 앬 앬 Thread type
Symbol Type
Actuation — Rc
Symbol Actuation N NPT
0 Automatically operated F G
3 Air operated
All other specifications are the same as the standard
products Series PA3000/5000.
150
ATEX Compliant
Pneumatic-Pneumatic Positioner
Series 55/56-IP5000 (Lever type)
Series 55/56-IP5100 (Rotary type)
II 2G Ex h IIC T6..T4 Gb For more details, other specifications,

II 2D Ex h IIIC T65°C..T105°C Db dimensions, see the specific catalogue.
How to Order
56 -IP5 000 0 1 0
ATEX category
Accessories Note 1)
55 2
56 3
Without accessory With standard lever (10 to
– (standard) 85 mm stroke) for 55/56-IP5000
Positioner type With Ø 0.7 output restrictor
A Common to 55/56-IP5000
integrated pilot valve
000 Lever type and 55/56-IP5100 small
With Ø 1.0 output restrictor capacity actuators
100 Rotary type B
With fork lever type
C fitting M
Input pressure Only for 55/56-IP5100
0 0.2 to 1.0 MPa (Standard) D fitting S
1 1/2 split, 0.02 to 0.06, 0.06 to 0.1 MPa With lever unit for a
E
35 to 100 mm stroke
Only for 55/56-IP5000 Note 2)
With lever unit for a
F
50 to 140 mm stroke
Pressure gauge (SUP, OUT1)
Note 1) If multiple accessories are required, they should be
0 Not provided indicated in alphabetical order.
1 0.2 MPa ex. 55-IP5000-010-AD
Note 2) For ''E'' and ''F'', standard lever is not provided.
2 0.3 MPa
3 1.0 MPa
Pressure gauge / Air port

Indication of opening Note 1) – Rc (Standard)
N NPT
0 Not provided
F G
1 Indicated
Note 1) 55/56-IP5000 is available only
with option ''0'' (no indication).
Ambient temperature
– –20 to 80 °C (Standard)
T High temperature –5 to 100 °C
L Low temperature –30 to 60 °C
Note ) Please refer to table below
Specifications

Classification Low temperature Standard High temperature All other specifications are the same as the
55-IP500-L- 55-IP500-- 55-IP500-T- standard products Series IP5000/5100.
Ex h IIC T4 Gb Click here for details.
II 2GD
Ex h IIIC T105°C Db
– – -5°C ≤ Ta ≤ 100°C
Ex h IIC T6 Gb
II 2GD
Ex h IIIC T65°C..T85°C Db
-30°C ≤ Ta ≤ 60°C -20°C ≤ Ta ≤ 80°C -5°C ≤ Ta ≤ 80°C
151
Series 55-/56-IP5000/5100
Specifications
Ambient temperature range Ambient temperature range

Low temp. model Standard model High temp. model Low temp. model Standard model High temp. model
Classification Classification
55-IP500-L- 55-IP500-- 55-IP500-T- 56-IP500-L- 56-IP500-- 56-IP500-T-
II 2GD c T4 – – -5 °C to 100 °C II 3GD c T4 – – -5 °C to 100 °C
II 2GD c T5 – -20 °C to 80 °C -5 °C to 80 °C II 3GD c T5 – -20 °C to 80 °C -5 °C to 80 °C
II 2GD c T6 -30 °C to 60 °C -20 °C to 60 °C -5 °C to 60 °C II 3GD c T6 -30 °C to 60 °C -20 °C to 60 °C -5 °C to 60 °C
Type 55/56-IP5000 55/56-IP5100

Lever type lever feedback Rotary type cam feedback
Item
Single action Double action Single action Double action
Supply pressure 0.14~0.7 MPa
Input pressure 0.02~0.1 MPa
Standard stroke 10~85mm 60~100
Sensitivity Within 0.1 % F.S. Within 0.5 % F.S.
Linearity Within ±1 % F.S. Within ±2 % F.S.
Hysteresis Within 0.75 % F.S. Within 1 % F.S.
Repeatability Within 0.5 % F.S.
Output flow rate 80 l/min (ANR) or more (SUP.=0.14 MPa)
200 l/min (ANR) or more (SUP.=0.4 MPa)
Air consumption Within 5 l/min (ANR) (SUP.=0.14 MPa)
Within 11 l/min (ANR) (SUP.=0.4 MPa)
Ambient and using fluid -20 °C~80 °C (Standard model)
Temperature -30 °C~60 °C (Low Temp.) -5 °C~100 °C (High Temp.)
Thermal coefficient Within 0.1 % F.S./C
Air connection port Rc 1/4 (Standard)
Material Aluminium diecast, Stainless steel, Brass, Nitrile rubber
Mass Approx. 1.4 kg Approx. 1.2 kg
Size 118 x 102 x 86 (Body) 118 x 92 x 77.5 (Body)
Note) Standard air temperature: 20, Absolute pressure: 101.3 kPa.
Relative humidity: 65 %
152
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner
Series IP6000 (Lever type)
Series IP6100 (Rotary type)

For more details, other specifications,
II 2G Ex ib IIC T5/T6 dimensions, see the specific catalogue.
How to Order
IP6 000 0 1 0 X14

ATEX category 2
Accessories Note 1)
Positioner type Without accesory With standard lever (10 to
–
000 Lever type (standard) 85 mm stroke) for IP6000
100 Rotary type With ø0.7 output restrictor
A Common to IP6000
and IP6100 small
With ø1.0 output restrictor
B capacity actuators
C
Pressure gauge (SUP, OUT1) fitting MX
Only for IP6100
1 0.2MPa (R1/8) With fork lever type
D
2 0.3MPa (R1/8) fitting SX
3 1.0MPa (R1/8) With lever unit for a
E
35 to 100 mm stroke
Only for IP6000
With lever unit for a
F
50 to 140 mm stroke
With compensation Common to IP6000
G
spring (A) and IP6100
Note 1) If multiple accessories are required, they should be
indicated in alphabetical order.
Specifications
IP6000 IP6100
Type
Levery type lever Rotary type cam
Item
Single action Double action Single action Double action
Input current 4~20mADC (Standard) Note1
Input resistance 235 ± 15Ω (4~20mADC)
Supply air pressure 0.14~0.7Mpa
Standard stroke 10~85mm (External lever allowable
60°~100° Note2
runout angle 10°~30°
Sensitivity Within 0.1%F.S. Within 0.5%F.S.
Linearity Within ±1%F.S. Within ±2%F.S.
Hysteresis Within 0.75%F.S. Within 1%F.S.
Repeatability Within ±0.5%F.S.
Thermal coefficient Within 0.1%F.S./°C
Output flow rate 80 l/min (ANR) or more (SUP.=0.14MPa) Note3
Air consumption Within 5 l/min (ANR) (SUP.=0.4MPa)
Ambient and using fluid -20°C~80°C (T5)
Temperature -20°C~60°C (T6)
Explosion protected Intrinsic safety type of explosion protection
Construction
( 0344 II 2G Ex ib II C T5/T6)
Approval No. KEMA No.03 ATEX1119

Air connection port 1/4NPT female screw
Electric wiring
M20 x 1.5
connection port
Material Aluminium diecast for the body
Mass Approx. 2.4kg
Classification of
JISF8007 IP55 (Conform to IEC 60529)
degree of protection
Parameters
Ui ≤ 28V, Ii ≤ 125mA, Pi ≤ 1.2W, Ci ≤ OnF, Li ≤ OmH
(Current circuit)
Note 1) 1/2 split range is possible with the standard type (by adjusting the span).
Note 2) The stroke is adjustable in 0~60 and 0~100.
Note 3) Standard air (JIS B0120): temp. 20°C, absolute press. 760mmHg, ratio humidity 65%.
153
Series IP6000/6100
Dimensions / IP6000
IP6000-0첸0-첸-X14 (lever type)
110
NP
30
2
14
2xM8x1.25 depth12 Two gauge ports are Rc1/8 thread
Female thread
for mounting, 168 SMC ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC POSITIONER
MODEL NO. IP6*00-0*0-*-X14-* Serial No.*****
OUT1.1/4NPT
side position 15 B
SUPPLY 0.14 to 0.7MPa(1.4 to 7bar)
INPUT 0/4 to 20mADC 20** MADE IN JAPAN 38
UI≤28V II≤125mA P≤1.2V CI≤0nf LI≤0nH
EExIb CT6 Ta≤60C
EExIb CT5 Ta≤80C
SUP.1/4NPT
11
SMC Corporation KEMA No.03ATEX1119
15
OUT2 1-16-4 Shinbashi Minatoku Tokyo 105-8659 Japan
SMC VIEW OF B
35
MPa
42
{bar}
35
122
100
6.1
16
130
20
SMC
MPa
{bar}
E
A P
50
MODEL IP6000
{ At accessory “E”: 110 }
M
125 At accessory “F”: 110 5
E
At accessory "E":195
150 { At accessory "F":275 }
46 125 53 M20X1.5
=180 Porting for elec-
trical connection
Mark ''M'' means
that this port is
''M'' thread
(OUT2.1/4NPT) 40 110
35
Pluged
OUT2
SMC M
MPa A
{bar}
65
SPAN
SMC
MPa
{bar}
22.5
Zero adjusting knob

4xM8x1.25 depth12 VIEW OF A
Span adjusting knob
Female thread for mounting,
backside.
154
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner Series IP6000/6100
Dimensions / IP6100
IP6100-0첸0-첸-X14 (rotary type)
116
NP
44
Two gauge ports are Rc1/8 thread
168 OUT1.1/4NPT
15 38 SUP.1/4NPT
SMC ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC POSITIONER
B SUPPLY 0.14 to 0.7MPa(1.4 to 7bar)

INPUT 0/4 to 20mADC
UI≤28V II≤125mA P≤1.2V CI≤0nf LI≤0nH
20** MADE IN JAPAN
11
EExIb CT6 Ta≤60C
OUT2 EExIb CT5 Ta≤80C
15

1-16-4 Shinbashi Minatoku Tokyo 105-8659 Japan
{bar}
MPa
SMC
VIEW OF B
35
42
35
100
90o
E P
{bar}
60o
MPa
SMC
20
130
30o
122
MODEL IP6100
A
50
Oo
30o
M
60o
90o
E
46 M20x1.5
125 53
2xM8x1.25 depth12 =180 Porting for elec-
trical connection
Female thread
for mounting,
side position Mark ''M'' means that
this port is ''M'' thread
Positioner body
(OUT2.1/4NPT) 40 110
Pluged 35
Hold spring OUT2
C C
{bar}
MPa
SMC
7
M
A
24 View of CC side
70(46)
63(39)
65
{bar}
MPa
SMC
Lever and pin assembly

Fork and shaft assembly
22.5
0
21
DA
Screw thread size M6x1 E
Main shaft of actuator SPAN
E
Dimension of optional ''Fork lever assembly''
( ) Shows dimension of fork
lever assembly type ''SX'' Zero adjusting knob VIEW OF A
4xM8x1.25 depth12
backside.
Note) The certificate of IP6000/6100 Series, can be

found on pages for IP8000/8100 Series
155
156
ATEX Compliant
Series IP8000 (Lever type)
Series IP8100 (Rotary type)
II 2G Ex ib IIC T5..T6 Gb For more details, other specifications,
dimensions, see the specific catalogue.
How to Order
ATEX Directive Intrinsically

Safe Explosion Proof IP8 000 0 0 0 X14 L
Option Note 7)
Positioner type Applicable model
000 Lever type Symbol Option
IP8000-X14 IP8100-X14
100 Rotary type
— — 앬 앬
Low temperature
L 앬 앬
(−40 to 60 °C)
Pressure gauge (SUP, OUT1)
With internal position
0 Not provided W — 앬
1 0.2 MPa (R 1/8) indicator
2 0.3 MPa (R 1/8)
3 1.0 MPa (R 1/8)
ATEX directive compliance and connection
ATEX directive category 2
Intrinsically safe explosion-proof equipment
X14 Air connection port: 1/4 NPT
Conduit connection port: M20 x 1.5
With blue cable gland
Accessories Note 1)
Symbol
Applicable model
Accessories
IP8000-X14 IP8100-X14
– Without accessory 앬 앬
A With Ø 0.7 output restrictor integrated pilot valve Note 2) 앬 앬
B With Ø 1.0 output restrictor integrated pilot valve Note 2) 앬 앬
C With fork lever type fitting M Note 3) — 앬
D With fork lever type fitting S Note 4) — 앬
E With lever unit for a 35 to 100 mm stroke Note 5) 앬 —
F With lever unit for a 50 to 140 mm stroke Note 5) 앬 —
G With compensation spring (A) Note 6) 앬 앬
H With external scale plate — 앬
Note 1) If multiple accessories are required, they should be indicated in
alphabetical order.
ex. IP8100-010-AG
Note 2) “A” is applied to approx 90 cm3-capacity actuator.
“B” is applied to approx 180 cm3-capacity actuator.
Note 3) Fork lever-type fitting MX (Connection thread: M6 x 1) for
IP8100-00--X14.
Note 4) Fork lever-type fitting SX (Connection thread: M6 x 1) for
IP8100-00--X14.
Note 5) Standard lever is not attached.
Note 6) It is to be used together with “A” or “B” when tending to overshoot
by the use of “A” or “B”. It is mounted to the body as a
Specifications replacement of the standard compensation spring.
Note 7) Combination of “L” and “W” is not available.
Classification IP800-X14/X14-W IP800-X14-L All other specifications are the same as the standard
II 2G Ex h ib IIC T5 Gb −20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +80°C — products Series IP8.
II 2G Ex h ib IIC T6 Gb −20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C −40°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
157
Series IP8000/8100
Accessory / Option
Pilot valve with output restriction (IP8000, 8100 type) External feedback lever (IP8000 type)
In general, mounting on a small-size actuator may cause hunting. For Different feedback levers are available dependent upon valve
prevention, a pilot valve with a built-in output restriction is available. strokes. Consult with SMC in case of 10 mm or less stroke.
The restriction is removable.
(Ambient temperature: Standard)
Stroke Unit number Size M Size N
Actuator Capacity Orifice size Part number Pilot unit part number 10 to 85 mm (standard) P368010-20 125 150
90 cm3 Ø 0.7 P36801080 P565010-18 35 to 100 mm (Accessory “E”) P368010-21 110 195
180 cm3 Ø1 P36801081 P565010-19 50 to 140 mm (Accessory “F”) P368010-22 110 275
Fork lever joints (IP8100 type)
6.1
Two types of the fork lever joints are available dependent upon different
16
mounting dimensions.
This is recommended because it can absorb off-centering, compared
with direct mounting type.
Part name Part number M 5
Fork lever assembly MX P368010-36 N

Fork lever assembly SX P368010-37
(MX type: 55)
(MX type: 63)
Cable gland (for -X14)

L2=31
Cable gland
(SX type: 77)
39
Description Part number Suited cable outer diameter

L1=101
(SX type: 39)
Cable gland 07-9534-1M2B Ø 6 to Ø 12

M6 x 1
63
M6 x 1
Actuator main shaft
Actuator main shaft
Side mounting with the fork Rear mounting with the fork
lever assembly MX lever assembly SX M20 x 1.5
Exploded View
Body cover unit

R
E
0
N
0
0
8
O
IP
IC
I
T
A
T
M
U
I
E
(3) Cover seal

N
S
P
O
O
R
O
T
P
C
E
L
E
Feedback spring
Mini-terminal unit (No terminal box)
(1) Pilot valve unit Compensation spring Span adjusting unit
M
AN
Zero adjusting unit SP
Torque motor unit
Feedback shaft assembly
Terminal joint unit

Feedback
(No terminal box)
SM
C lever unit
Pa
M
C
SM
Pa
OU M
SU
P
Body unit
Replacement Parts (Ambient temperature: Standard)
No. Description Part no. Note
1 Pilot valve unit P565010-7
(2) Base seal

2 Base seal P56501012-3 IP8000/8100
3 Cover seal P56501013
158
Electro-Pneumatic Positioner Series IP8000/8100
Dimensions / IP8000
IP8000-00--X14 (lever type)
100
NP
30
46
2
14
2 x Rc 1/8
198 OUT1.1/4 NPT
23.5 43 SMC ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC POSITIONER
SUP.1/4 NPT
INPUT 0/4 to 20mADC
UI28V II125mA P1.2V CI0nF LI0nH
20** MADE IN JAPAN 38
EExIb CT6 Ta60C
B SMC Corporation
EExIb CT5 Ta80C
KEMA No.03ATEX1119
11
9
OUT2
SMC
MPa
VIEW OF B
39
{bar}
39
42
147
117
6.1
SMC
16
20
MPa
{bar}
ELECTORO PNEUMATIC IP8000

A
50
1
{ AtAt accessory
accessory “E”: 110
“F”: 110 }
125 5
M
125 35 M20 x 1.5

=199 150 Porting for electrical
connection
Mark ''M'' means that { AtAt accessory
accessory "E":195
"F":275 }
192
(OUT2.1/4 NPT) 40 110
35 58 23.5
Pluged 2xM8x1.25 depth12
OUT2 2xM8x1.25 depth12 Female thread
SMC
MPa
Female thread for mounting, for mounting,
{bar} M
A side position backside
SPAN
SMC
MPa
{bar}
122
65
22.5
Zero adjusting knob Span adjusting knob
VIEW OF A
159
Series IP8000 / 8100
Dimensions / IP8100
IP8100-00--X14 (rotary type)
100
NP SMC ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC POSITIONER
INPUT 0/4 to 20mADC 20** MADE IN JAPAN
44
46
UI28V II125mA P1.2V CI0nf LI0nH
EExIb CT6 Ta60C
EExIb CT5 Ta80C
15
VIEW OF B
192 2 x Rc 1/8
40 110 198 OUT1.1/4 NPT
35 58 23.5 23.5 43 SUP.1/4 NPT
4xM8x1.25 depth12
B 38
Female thread
11
for mounting, 9 OUT2
SMC
side position MPa
{bar}
39
39
42
147
117
SMC
MPa
65
20
{bar}
122
A
50
ELECTORO PNEUMATIC IP8100

22.5
1
M
E
2xM8x1.25 depth12 125 35 M20 x 1.5
=199 Porting for electrical
backside. Mark ''M'' means that connection
VIEW OF A
(OUT2.1/4 NPT)
Pluged
OUT2
Positioner body
SMC
MPa
{bar} M
A
Hold spring
C C
7
SMC
MPa
{bar}
24 View of CC side
70(46)
63(39)
Lever and pin assembly E
SPAN
Fork and shaft assembly
21
Screw thread size M6x1 Zero adjusting knob

Main shaft of actuator
Dimension of optional ''Fork lever assembly''
( ) Shows dimension of fork
lever assembly type ''SX''
160
ATEX Compliant
Smart Positioner
(Lever type / Rotary type)
Series 52-IP8001/8101
II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4/T5/T6 Ga
T4..T5: Ta = -20°C to 80°C T6: Ta = -20°C to 60°C
How to Order
ATEX directive compliance Specifications

ATEX directive category 1 Intrinsically safe explosion proof (ATEX) +
52 Intrinsically safe explosion-proof
4 output function + HART communication
ATEX Directive Intrinsically

Safe Explosion proof 52 IP8 001 0 3 4
ATEX temperature
ATEX Applicable model
Symbol
temperature IP8001 IP8101
— T4 앬 앬
T6 T5/T6 앬 앬
Lever type
IP8001
Connection
Symbol Air Electric
Rotary type
IP8101 — Rc 1/4 G 1/2
M Note) Rc 1/4 M20 x 1.5
Type N Rc 1/4 1/2 NPT
001 Smart Lever type
1 1/4 NPT G 1/2
101 Smart Rotary type
2 Note) 1/4 NPT M20 x 1.5
3 1/4 NPT 1/2 NPT
Pressure gauge 4 G 1/4 G 1/2
Symbol
Pressure Applicable model 5 Note) G 1/4 M20 x 1.5
gauge IP8001 IP8101 6 G 1/4 1/2 NPT
1 0.2 MPa 앬 — Note) When the symbol is M, 2, or 5 for 52-
2 0.3 MPa 앬 — ATEX directive items, a blue cable
gland is included with the electrical
3 1.0 MPa 앬 앬 connection.
Accessories Note 1)
Applicable model
Symbol Accessories
IP8001 IP8101
— None (Standard) 앬 앬
C Fork lever-type fitting M — 앬
D Fork lever-type fitting S — 앬
E For stroke 35 to 100 mm with lever unit Note 2) 앬 —
F For stroke 50 to 140 mm with lever unit Note 2) 앬 —
H With external scale plate Note 3) — 앬
W Body with LCD window 앬 앬 the standard products Series IP8.
Note 1) If two or more accessories are required, the part numbers should be given in For details, refer to the WEB catalogue.
alphabetical order.
ex. 52-IP8101-034-CH
Note 2) Standard lever is not attached.
Note 3) For side mounting, select “-W” and check the control position by viewing the
LCD display value.
Specifications

Classification 52-IP801 52-IP801-T6
II 1G Ex h ia IIC T4 Ga −20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +80°C —
II 1G Ex h ia IIC T5 Ga — −20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +80°C
II 1G Ex h ia IIC T6 Ga — −20°C ≤ Ta ≤ +60°C
161
Series 52-IP8001/8101
Specifications Note 1)
Type IP8001 IP8101

Smart Positioner
Lever type Rotary type
Item Single action / Double action
Input current 4 to 20 mA DC (Standard) Note 2)
Min. operating current 3.85 mA DC or more
Intra-terminal voltage 12 V DC (equivalent to 600 Ω input resistance, at 20 mA DC)
Max. supplied power 1 W (Imax: 100 mA DC, Vmax: 28 V DC)
Supply air pressure 0.14 to 0.7 MPa 0.3 to 0.7 MPa
Standard stroke 10 to 85 mm (Allowable deflection angle 10 to 30°) 60 to 100°
Sensitivity Note 3) Within 0.2 % F.S.
Linearity Note 3) Within ±1 % F.S.
Hysteresis Note 3) Within 0.5 % F.S.
Repeatability Note 3) Within ±0.5 % F.S.
Coefficient of temperature Within 0.05 % F.S./C
Supply pressure fluctuation — Note 4)
Output flow Note 5)
80 l/min (ANR) or more (SUP = 0.14 MPa) 200 l/min (ANR) or more (SUP = 0.4 MPa)
Note 5) 2 l/min (ANR) or less (SUP = 0.14 MPa) 11 l/min (ANR) or less
Air consumption
4 l/min (ANR) or less (SUP = 0.4 MPa) (SUP = 0.4 MPa)
Ambient and fluid –20 °C to 80 °C (T4/T5)

temperature –20 °C to 60 °C (T6)
Explosion proof ATEX intrinsically safe explosion-proof construction

construction Note 6) (ΙΙ 1G Ex ia ΙΙC T4/T5/T6)
ATEX intrinsically safe explosion-proof Ui ≤ 28 V, Ii ≤ 100 mA, Pi ≤ 0.7 W,
parameter (current circuit) Ci ≤ 12.5 nF, Li ≤ 1.5 mH
Enclosure Protection Rating JISF8007, IP65 (conforms to IEC Pub.60529)
Communication method Note 6) HART transmission
Air connection port Note 7) Rc 1/4 female thread, NPT 1/4 female thread, G 1/4 female thread
Electrical connection port Note 7) G 1/2 female thread, M20 x 1.5 female thread, NPT 1/2 female thread
Material/coating Aluminum diecast body/baking finish with denatured epoxy resin
Weight 2.6 kg
Note 1) Specification values are given at normal temperature (20 °C).
Note 2) 1/2 Split range (Standard)
Note 3) Characteristics relating to accuracy differ depending on combination with other constituent loop equipment, such as positioners and actuators.
Note 4) While there is no output changes due to pressure fluctuations, when the pressure supply setting is changed following calibration, once again
adjust balance current and perform calibration.
Note 5) (ANR) indicates JIS B0120 standard air.
Note 6) Model selection required for explosion proof construction and HART transmission.
Note 7) Thread type can be specified by model selection.
Optional Specifications
Type 52-IP801-04
Item Smart Positioner
Wiring 2-wire
Output signal 4 to 20 mA DC
Analogue
Power supply voltage 10 to 28 V DC
output
Load resistance 0 to 750 Ω
Accuracy ±0.5 % F.S. or less Note 1)
Wiring 2-wire
Applicable standards DIN19234/NAMUR Standard
Power supply voltage 5 to 28 V DC
Alarm
Load resistance (Constant current output)
output 1, 2
Alarm ON ≥2.1 mA DC
Alarm OFF (Leakage current) ≤1.2 mA DC
Response time 50 msec or less
Note 1) Indicates analogue output accuracy with respect to LCD display position value (P value).
162
52-IP8001/8101
Smart Positioner Series
Accessory / Option
Fork lever-type fittings (8101) External feedback lever (IP8001)
2 types of rotary type IP8101 fork lever-type fittings, that differ by Different feedback levers are available dependent upon valve
installation dimensions dependent on bracket installation method, strokes. Order according to the valve stroke.
and 2 types of installation portion thread sizes, are available. Feedback lever types
When installing on the side surface, using fork lever assembly M
provides interchangeability with the installation dimensions of SMC Unit number Model selection
IP610 positioner. When installing on the rear surface, using fork lever Stroke Size M Size N
IP8001 accessory
assembly S also provides interchangeability with the installation Standard
dimensions of SMC IP610 positioner. 10 to 85 mm P565010-323 125 150 accessory
Installation Model selection 35 to 100 mm P565010-324 110 195 E

Part name Unit number portion
thread size accessory 50 to 140 mm P565010-325 110 275 F
Available as
Fork lever assembly M P368010-24 C 6 to 12 mm P565010-329 75 75 special order
M8 x 1.25
Fork lever assembly S P368010-25 D
6.1
(M type: 63)
16
(M type: 55)
L2=31
39
M 5
(S type: 77)
L1=101
N
(S type: 39)
M8 x 1.25
63
M8 x 1.25
Actuator main shaft
Actuator main shaft
Side mounting with the fork Rear mounting with the fork lever
lever assembly M assembly S
Exploded View
Cover unit for base
IP8101
(3) Cover seal
Body cover unit
Base unit
Balance spring unit
Base bracket unit
Potentiometer unit
(1) Pilot valve unit
M A
Zero adjusting unit Feedback shaft unit
Fork pin unit
Fork lever assembly
Double joint unit SM

C
a
MP
Lead wire guard

Torque motor unit
C
SM
a
MP
SU
P
Body unit
Replacement Parts (Common for IP8001/8101)

Part no.
No. Description
IP8001 IP8101
1 Pilot valve unit P565010-322 P565010-303
Terminal joint unit 2 Base seal P56501012-3
(2) Base seal
3 Cover seal P56501013
163
Series 52-IP8001/8101
Dimensions / IP8001 (Lever type)
-IP8001-W
121
E
31
46
A
SUP.1/4 (Rc, NPT, G)
2
192
13
40 110 198 OUT1.1/4 (Rc, NPT, G)
35 58 23.5 23.5 43
38
SMC
11
9
OUT2
MPa
42
39
39
109
SMC
6.1
16
147
MPa
65
20
electro-pneumatic
122
A
50
22.5
125
14
At accessory “E”: 110
At accessory “F”: 110 5
150
4 x M8 x 1.25 depth12 125 At accessory “E”: 195 23 28
Female for rear mounting 229 At accessory “F”: 275
2 x M8 x 1.25 depth12
OUT2.1/4 (Rc, NPT, G) 110 2 x 1/2 (G, NPT), M20
Female thread for side mounting
With plug Electric conduit
Resin cable gland
38
Applicable cable O. D. Ø 6 to 12
(Only supplied when the M20 is selected for
intrinsically safe explosion proof products)
Note) The accessory body cover for LCD with
viewing panel can be selected irrespective
of specifications.
Dimensions / IP8101 (Rotary type)
-IP8101- 04
121
44
46
15
A
192 231
40 110 198 OUT1.1/4 (Rc, NPT, G)
35 58 23.5 23.5 43 SUP.1/4 (Rc, NPT, G)
38
SMC
11
9
OUT2
MPa
39
39
0%
109
42
SMC
147
25%
MPa
65
20
122
A
50%
DA
50
electro-pneumatic
22.5
75%
0%
14
10
4 x M8 x 1.25 depth12 125 23 28

Female thread for rear mounting 229 2 x 1/2 (G, NPT), M20
2 x M8 x 1.25 depth12
OUT2.1/4 (Rc, NPT, G) 110 Electric conduit
Female thread for side mounting
Resin cable gland At accessory “H”:

38
(with external scale plate)

Applicable cable O. D. Ø 6 to 12
(Only supplied when the M20 is selected for
intrinsically safe explosion proof products)
Note) The accessory body cover for LCD with
viewing panel can be selected irrespective
of specifications.
164
ATEX Compliant
Pneumatic Cylinder Positioner

Series 56-IP200/56-IP210
II 3G Ex h IIC T6..T4 Gc
II 3D Ex h IIIC T65°C..T105°C Dc
How to Order
56 - IP2 0 0 - -
Conform to ATEX
directive category 3 Stroke 25
to 300 mm
Model Temperature and Material

0 Standard – Standard -5 to 60 °C
1 Outside tube fixed to the main body T High -5 to 100 °C
L Low -30 to 60 °C
Feedback spring and zero adjuster
S screw made of stainless steel
Specifications

Low temp. model Standard model High temp. model
Classification
56-IP20--L 56-IP20- 56-IP20--T
Ex h IIC T4 Gc
II 3GD — — –5°C ≤ Ta ≤ 100°C
Ex h IIIC T105°C Dc
Ex h IIC T6 Gc
II 3GD –30°C ≤ Ta ≤ 60°C –5°C ≤ Ta ≤ 60°C –5°C ≤ Ta ≤ 80°C
Ex h IIIC T65°C..T85°C Dc
Supply pressure 0.3 ~ 0.7 MPa

Signal pressure 0.02 ~ 0.1 MPa
Port size Rc 1/4 (standard)
Pressure gauge port type Rc 1/8
Linearity Less than ± 2 % F.S.
Hysteresis Less than 1 % F.S.
Repeatability Less than ± 1 % F.S.
Sensitivity Less than 0.5 % F.S.
Air consumption 18 l/min (ANR) or less (at 0.5 MPa supply)
Max. air flow 200 l/min (ANR) or less (at 0.5 MPa supply)
Applicable cylinder [mm] 50 ~ 300 bore sizes / 25 ~ 300 mm stroke
-5 °C ~ 60 °C (Standard)
Operating temperature -30 °C ~ 60 °C (Low Temperature)
-5 °C ~ 100 °C (High Temperature)
Note) Standard air temperature: 20, Absolute pressure: 101.3 kPa. Relative humidity: 65 %
All other specifications are the same as the standard products Series IP200.
165
Safety Instructions
These safety instructions are intended to prevent hazardous situations and/or
Safety Instructions equipment damage. These instructions indicate the level of potential hazard with the
labels of “Caution,” “Warning” or “Danger.” They are all important notes for safety
and must be followed in addition to International Standards (ISO/IEC)∗1), and other
safety regulations. In addition to these safety instructions, please refer to Instruction
Manual specific to the product.
∗1) ISO 4414: Pneumatic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
Caution indicates a hazard with a low level of risk
Caution: which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate ISO 4413: Hydraulic fluid power – General rules relating to systems.
injury. IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines.
Warning indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk (Part 1: General requirements)
Warning: which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious ISO 10218-1: Manipulating industrial robots - Safety.
injury. etc.
Danger : which,
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning Limited warranty and Disclaimer/

1. The compatibility of the product is the responsibility of the person Compliance Requirements
who designs the equipment or decides its specifications.
Since the product specified here is used under various operating conditions, its The product used is subject to the following “Limited warranty and
compatibility with specific equipment must be decided by the person who designs the Disclaimer” and “Compliance Requirements”.
equipment or decides its specifications based on necessary analysis and test results. Read and accept them before using the product.
The expected performance and safety assurance of the equipment will be the
responsibility of the person who has determined its compatibility with the product. This
person should also continuously review all specifications of the product referring to its Limited warranty and Disclaimer
latest catalogue information, with a view to giving due consideration to any possibility of
equipment failure when configuring the equipment. 1. The warranty period of the product is 1 year in service or 1.5 years
2. Only personnel with appropriate training should operate machinery after the product is delivered, wichever is first.∗2)
and equipment. Also, the product may have specified durability, running distance or
The product specified here may become unsafe if handled incorrectly. The assembly,
replacement parts. Please consult your nearest sales branch.
operation and maintenance of machines or equipment including our products must be
performed by an operator who is appropriately trained and experienced. 2. For any failure or damage reported within the warranty period which is clearly
3. .Do not service or attempt to remove product and our responsibility, a replacement product or necessary parts will be provided.
machinery/equipment until safety is confirmed. This limited warranty applies only to our product independently, and not to any
1. The inspection and maintenance of machinery/equipment should only be performed other damage incurred due to the failure of the product.
after measures to prevent falling or runaway of the driven objects have been
confirmed. 3. Prior to using SMC products, please read and understand the warranty
2. When the product is to be removed, confirm that the safety measures as mentioned terms and disclaimers noted in the specified catalogue for the particular
above are implemented and the power from any appropriate source is cut, and read
products.
and understand the specific product precautions of all relevant products carefully.
3. Before machinery/equipment is restarted, take measures to prevent unexpected ∗2) Vacuum pads are excluded from this 1 year warranty.
operation and malfunction. A vacuum pad is a consumable part, so it is warranted for a year after it is delivered.
Also, even within the warranty period, the wear of a product due to the use of the vacuum
4. Contact SMC beforehand and take special consideration of safety pad or failure due to the deterioration of rubber material are not covered by the limited
measures if the product is to be used in any of the following warranty.
conditions.
1. Conditions and environments outside of the given specifications, or use outdoors or in
a place exposed to direct sunlight.
2. Installation on equipment in conjunction with atomic energy, railways, air navigation,
Compliance Requirements
space, shipping, vehicles, military, medical treatment, combustion and recreation, or 1. The use of SMC products with production equipment for the manufacture
equipment in contact with food and beverages, emergency stop circuits, clutch and
brake circuits in press applications, safety equipment or other applications unsuitable of weapons of mass destruction (WMD) or any other weapon is strictly
for the standard specifications described in the product catalogue. prohibited.
3. An application which could have negative effects on people, property, or animals
2. The exports of SMC products or technology from one country to another are
requiring special safety analysis.
4. Use in an interlock circuit, which requires the provision of double interlock for possible governed by the relevant security laws and regulations of the countries
failure by using a mechanical protective function, and periodical checks to confirm involved in the transaction. Prior to the shipment of a SMC product to
proper operation. another country, assure that all local rules governing that export are known
and followed.
Caution Caution
1. The product is provided for use in manufacturing industries. SMC products are not intended for use as instruments for legal
The product herein described is basically provided for peaceful use in manufacturing metrology.
industries. Measurement instruments that SMC manufactures or sells have not been qualified by
If considering using the product in other industries, consult SMC beforehand and exchange type approval tests relevant to the metrology (measurement) laws of each country.
specifications or a contract if necessary. Therefore, SMC products cannot be used for business or certification ordained by the
If anything is unclear, contact your nearest sales branch. metrology (measurement) laws of each country.
Safety Instructions Be sure to read “Handling Precautions for SMC Products” (M-E03-3) before using.
166
Common Precautions
Be sure to read before handing.
Selection 3. Drain
If condensation in the air filter is not emptied on a regular
basis, condensation that flows to the outlet side can cause a
Warning malfunction. If it is difficult to check and remove, installation of
a filter with an auto-drain function is recommended. Refer to
1. Confirm specifications. Best Pneumatics for details on compressed air quality.
Products represented in this catalogue are designed for use in 4. Use clean air
compressed air applications only (including vacuum), unless Do not use compressed air which includes chemicals,
otherwise indicated. Do not use the products outside of their synthetic oils containing organic solvents, salt, or corrosive
designed parameters. Contact SMC when using the product gases, etc., as this can cause damage or malfunction.
with fluids other than compressed air (including vacuum).
Installation Environment
Warning Warning
1. Do not install unless the safety instructions have 1. Do not use in an environment where the product is
directly exposed to corrosive gases, chemicals, sea
been read and understood. water, water or steam.
Keep this catalogue on file for future reference.
2. In locations which receive direct sunlight, provide a
2. Maintenance protective cover, etc.
When installing the product, allow for maintenance access.
3. Do not operate in locations where vibration or impact
3. Tightening torque occurs.
When installing the product, follow the torque specification.
4. Do not use in locations where radiated heat will be
received from nearby heat sources.
5. Avoid striking the product with a metallic object.
6. Avoid using this product in a non-explosive environment
Piping which can become explosive due to air leakage.
Caution
1. Before piping
Before piping is connected, it should be thoroughly blown out Maintenance
with air (flushing) or washed to remove chips, cutting oil and
other debris from inside the pipe.
Warning
2. Sealant tape
When installing piping or a fitting into a port, make sure that 1. Maintenance procedures are outlined in the
the sealant material does not clog the pressure port. Leave operation manual.
the first 1.5 to 2 thread turns exposed at the end of the pipe/ Failure to follow proper procedures can result in product
fitting when using sealant tape. malfunction and or lead to damage to the equipment or
machine.
2. Maintenance
If handled improperly, compressed air can be dangerous.
Air Supply Assembly, handling and repair of pneumatic systems should
only be performed by qualified personnel.
Warning 3. Drain
Remove condensation from the filter bowl on a regular basis.
1. Operation fluid 4. Shut down before maintenance
Consult with SMC when using the product in applications Before attempting any kind of maintenance confirm that the
which use fluids other than compressed air (including supply pressure is shut off and all residual air pressure is
vacuum). released from the system to be worked on.
Regarding products for general fluids, consult with SMC
regarding applicable fluids. 5. Start-up after maintenance
Apply operating pressure and power to the equipment, then
2. Large amount of drainage. check for proper operation and possible air leaks. If operation
Compressed air containing larger mount of drainage can is abnormal, verify product set-up parameters.
cause malfunction of pneumatic equipment.
Please installation of an air dryer and mist separator (Drain 6. Do not make any modification to the product.
Catch) before air filter.
167
SMC products “out of scope” of the ATEX Directive
Products that are out of scope of the ATEX Directive do not need a declaration of conformity to ATEX for use in potentially explosive
atmospheres. These products can be used in ATEX zones as specified.
SMC products which are out of scope of the ATEX Directive match part of the definitions of components or equipment
(see ATEX Directive Article 1(3)).
See below for definitions of components and equipment.
For “equipment out of scope” and also equipment within the scope, the user has the responsibility for hazards arising from the assembly of
several products. For “components out of scope”, the user has the responsibility to assess the suitability of using these products in an
explosive atmosphere and in his application.
Equipment out of scope
Equipment is defined by the ATEX Directive as “machines, apparatus, fixed or mobile devices, control components and instrumentation
thereof and detection or prevention systems which, separately or jointly, are intended for the generation, transfer, storage, measurement,
control and conversion of energy and/or the processing of material and which are capable of causing an explosion through their own
potential sources of ignition.” (Article 1(3))
Out of scope
Equipment in scope of the ATEX directive has an autonomous function in a process and an ignition source of its own.
Products that fit the definition of equipment but do not have an ignition source of their own are “out of scope”.
Therefore products such as hand valves, pressure gauges, pressure regulators etc are “out of scope” if an Ignition Hazard Assessment
shows that they do not have any ignition sources of their own. This does not include ignition hazards that arise from the assembly of these
products in a circuit. An example for this is heat due to adiabatic compression, which can occur in a dead ended pipe when the pressure
cycles but also at a closed valve or in a pressure gauge.
SMC can supply a declaration confirming that “equipment out of scope” does not have any ignition sources of their own for use in given
zones. Please contact SMC if you require a declaration.
Table 1: SMC products (equipment), which are out of scope because they do not have any potential ignition source of their own.
Product description Series Out of scope for zone: Note
Heavy duty Auto Drain ADH4000 1, 2 1

Air filters AF10/20/30/40/50/60 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Main line filters AFF2B~AFF75B 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Mist separators AM150~850 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Micro mist separators AMD150~850, AMD801 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Super mist separators AME150~850 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Odour removal filters AMF150~850, AMF801 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Water separators AMG150~850 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Micro mist separator with pre-filter AMH150~850 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Clean gas filter SFA, SFB, SFC 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Micro mist separator AFD20/30/40 1,2, 21, 22 1
Mist separator AFM20/30/40 1,2, 21, 22 1
Lubricator AL10/20/30/40/50/60 1,2, 21, 22 1, 2
Large flow lubricator AL800/900 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 2
MR Unit AMR3000~6000 1, 2 1
Regulator AR10/20/25/20/30/40/50/60 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 2
Pilot operated regulator AR425 to 935 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Miniature regulator ARJ 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Manifold regulator ARM5, ARM10/11, ARM1000/2000/2500/3000 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 2, 3
Precision regulator ARP20~40 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 2
Regulator for 2 MPa ARX 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Filter regulator AW10/20/30/40/60 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 2
Clean regulator SRH, SRP11#1 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Air hydro Converter CCT 1, 2 1
Pressure Gauges G(A)14/15/27/33/36/46/46E, GZ46, GC3, GD40 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Booster relay IL100 1, 2 1
Lock up valve IL201/211/220 1, 2 1
Precision regulator IR1000/2000/3000 1, 2 1
Vacuum regulator IRV1000/2000/3000, IRV10/20 1, 2 1
Filter regulator IW212~217 1, 2 1
Hand valve VH200/201/400/401 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Finger valve VHK2 1, 2 1
168
Product description Series Out of scope Note
2 Port Micro Mechanical Valve VM11-4N(U)- 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 4, 5, 6
2/3 Port Mechanical Valve VM12--, VM131--35 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 4, 5, 6
VM220-02-, VM230-02-35
3 port mechanical valve VM430-01-, VM830-01- 1, 2, 21, 22 1, 5, 6
5 port mechanical valves VZM45-01--(F), VZM55-01--(F) 1,2, 21, 22 1, 5, 6
VFM35-02--(F), VFM25-02--(F)
3 port residual pressure release valve VHS20/30/40/50 1, 2, 21, 22 1
Multistage ejector ZL 1, 2 1, 2
Note 1: Note 4:
• Limited to explosive atmospheres types IIA, IIB 2 port only, 3 port excluded: for 3-positon twist selector
• It is the circuit designer’s responsibility to ensure significant heat (VM100, 200): 3 port only, 5 port excluded.
generation due to compression of operating gas does not occur.
• The explosive atmosphere is not allowed to enter the pneumatic Note 5:
circuit, even in case of expected malfunction. For types with roller, the friction between roller and its axle must be
• The product is not intended for use in an environment where stray assessed with the assembly the valve is used for.
electric currents can be induced or where cathodic corrosion
protection is used. Note 6:
• Exhaust air or leakage should not be allowed to whirl up gathered The valves must not be actuated beyond the total travel given in the
dust and create a potentially explosive dust atmosphere. documentation, even in the case of expected malfunction.
Note 2: Note 7:
Excluding options with electrical pressure/vacuum/level switch or Excluding option Z: with miniature indicator.
electrical valve
Note 3:
For ARM10/11, ARM5: Excluding options with 3-way valve.
Components
“Components’’ are defined by the ATEX Directive as “any item essential to the safe functioning of equipment and protective systems but
with no autonomous function.” (Article 1(3))
It is the users’ responsibility to assess components when he assembles them into equipment or protective systems covered by the ATEX
Directive.
Out of scope
Products that do not have an autonomous function and are not essential to the safe functioning of ATEX equipment and protective systems
are out of scope of the ATEX Directive.
SMC products which are out of scope as they do not have an autonomous function and which SMC does not explicitly intend for the safe
functioning of ATEX equipment and protective systems are listed in Table 2. These have to be assessed by the user, when he carries out
the Ignition Hazard Assessment of his assembly.
Table 2: SMC products without autonomous function (components), which are out of scope because they are not (intended
Product description Series Product description Series

Check valve AK, AKB, AKH Multi holder TM, TMA
Silencers AN, 25 Holder TMH
Quick exhaust valve AQ Shuttle valve VR12, VR12F
Speed controller AS, ASP, ASD Cross interface Y24~Y54
Multi-connector DM, KDM Vacuum pads ZP
Self align fittings H, DL, L, LL VCC12(D)-00
Valve for Water and
Floating joint JA, JB, JS Chemical-base Fluids, for
Insert fittings KF, KFG Brackets Mounting brackets for cylinders,
FRL, valves and so on when
S Couplers KK, KKA, KK130
Fittings KQ, KQ2, KP, KA, KG, KJ, Manifold base SS5Y5-20--()
KM, KR, KW SS5Y5-41--()
SS5Y5-42--()
Miniature fittings M, MS
SS5Y7-20--()
Tubing T, TS, TU, TUS, TUH, TRB,
TRS, TRBU, TA, TPH, TPS
Note) Out of scope for / can be used in all zones subject to assessment by user.
169
Expertise – Passion – Automation
SMC Corporation
Akihabara UDX 15F, 4-14-1
Sotokanda, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 101-0021, JAPAN
Phone: 03-5207-8249
Fax: 03-5298-5362
www.smc.eu
Austria +43 (0)2262622800 www.smc.at office@smc.at Lituania +370 5 2308118 www.smclt.lt info@smclt.lt
Belgium +32 (0)33551464 www.smcpneumatics.be info@smcpneumatics.be Netherlands +31 (0)205318888 www.smcpneumatics.nl info@smcpneumatics.nl
Bulgaria +359 (0)2807670 www.smc.bg office@smc.bg Norway +47 67129020 www.smc-norge.no post@smc-norge.no
Croatia +385 (0)13707288 www.smc.hr office@smc.hr Poland +48 222119600 www.smc.pl office@smc.pl
Czech Republic +420 541424611 www.smc.cz office@smc.cz Portugal +351 226166570 www.smc.eu postpt@smc.smces.es
Denmark +45 70252900 www.smcdk.com smc@smcdk.com Romania +40 213205111 www.smcromania.ro smcromania@smcromania.ro
Estonia +372 6510370 www.smcpneumatics.ee smc@smcpneumatics.ee Russia +7 8127185445 www.smc-pneumatik.ru info@smc-pneumatik.ru
Finland +358 207513513 www.smc.fi smcfi@smc.fi Slovakia +421 (0)413213212 www.smc.sk office@smc.sk
France +33 (0)164761000 www.smc-france.fr info@smc-france.fr Slovenia +386 (0)73885412 www.smc.si office@smc.si
Germany +49 (0)61034020 www.smc.de info@smc.de Spain +34 902184100 www.smc.eu post@smc.smces.es
Greece +30 210 2717265 www.smchellas.gr sales@smchellas.gr Sweden +46 (0)86031200 www.smc.nu post@smc.nu
Hungary +36 23513000 www.smc.hu office@smc.hu Switzerland +41 (0)523963131 www.smc.ch info@smc.ch
Ireland +353 (0)14039000 www.smcpneumatics.ie sales@smcpneumatics.ie Turkey +90 212 489 0 440 www.smcpnomatik.com.tr info@smcpnomatik.com.tr
Italy +39 0292711 www.smcitalia.it mailbox@smcitalia.it UK +44 (0)845 121 5122 www.smcpneumatics.co.uk sales@smcpneumatics.co.uk
Latvia +371 67817700 www.smclv.lv info@smclv.lv
Printing AT 00 Printed in Spain

DKI-50185-Db-UK Specifications are subject to change without prior notice and any obligation on the part of the manufacturer

Atex-D Eu

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Atex-D Eu

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Expertise – Passion – Automation

ATEX Compliant Products

Outline of ATEX directive New elements at a glance

List of ATEX compliant products

Serial Transmission System Fieldbus System for outputs: 56-EX260 앬 49

Auto Switch Solid State Switch 앬 102

Rotary Actuator Rotary Actuator: 55-CRB1 앬 120

Booster Regulator Booster Regulator: 56-VBA 앬 128

2 Port Valve for Fluid Control Steam Valve: 56-VND 앬 137

Instrumentation Equipment Pneumatic-Pneumatic Positioner: 55-IP5000/5100 앬 151

Dust protection all EN 60079-0 EN 80079-36

X = means that special conditions for use are in the

Specifications Safety Instructions

Manifold specifications for 20 type Manifold specifications for 20 type

Model SS5Y5-20 SS5Y7-20 Port size Flow characteristics

Model SS5Y5-41 SS5Y5-42 SS5Y7-42 Port size Flow characteristics

14.7 2-Ø 3.2

2-M3 Threads depth 3.5

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

2-Ø 2.2 27.2

2-M3 Threads depth 3.5

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Lead wire marking

2-M3 threads depth 3.5

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Insulation Manual override 57

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Lead wire marking

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Lead wire marking

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Lead wire marking

Insulation Manual override

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Lead wire marking

Insulation Manual override

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Lead wire marking

66.5 (For E type)

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

66.5 (For E type)

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

2-Ø 4.3 37.2

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Base mounted type

71.2 (For E type)

Plug connector with cover type (LL)

Terminal type (TT)

Base mounted type

71.2 (For E type)

Plug connector with cover type (LL)